Ricoh Fax Machine Facsimile User Guide
FAX Option Type 3245  
Operating Instructions  
Facsimile Reference  
<Advanced Features>  
Transmission Mode  
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
Communication Information  
Other Transmission Features  
Reception Features  
Fax via Computer  
Simplifying the Operation  
Facsimile Features  
Administrator Setting  
Solving Operation Problems  
Appendix  
Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to read the Safety  
Information in the “General Settings Guide” before using the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manuals for This Machine  
The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For  
particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual.  
Note  
❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type.  
❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader/Adobe Reader is necessary to view the manuals as a  
PDF file.  
❒ Two CD-ROMs are provided:  
• CD-ROM 1“Operating Instructions”  
• CD-ROM 2“Scanner Driver and Document Management Utility”  
❖ General Settings Guide  
Provides an overview of the machine and describes System Settings (such as  
Tray Paper Settings), Document Server functions, and troubleshooting.  
Refer to this manual for Address Book procedures such as registering fax  
numbers, e-mail addresses, and user codes.  
❖ Security Reference  
This manual is for administrators of this machine. It describes security func-  
tions that the administrators can use to protect data from being tampered, or  
prevent the machine from unauthorized use. Also refer to this manual for the  
procedures for registering administrators, as well as setting user and admin-  
istrator authentication.  
❖ Network Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM1)  
Provides information about configuring and operating the printer in a net-  
work environment or using software.  
This manual covers all models, and therefore contains functions and settings  
that may not be available for your model.  
Images, illustrations, functions, and supported operating systems may differ  
from those of your model.  
❖ Copy Reference  
Describes operations, functions, and troubleshooting for the machine’s copier  
function.  
❖ Facsimile Reference <Basic Features>  
Describes operations, functions, and troubleshooting for the machine’s fac-  
simile function.  
❖ Facsimile Reference<Advanced Features>(this manual)  
Describes advanced facsimile functions such as line settings and procedures  
for registering IDs.  
❖ Printer Reference  
Describes system settings, operations, functions, and trouble shooting for the  
machine’s printer function.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❖ Scanner Reference (PDF file - CD-ROM1)  
Describes operations, functions, and troubleshooting for the machine’s scan-  
ner function.  
❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinder Lite  
DeskTopBinder Lite is a utility included on the CD-ROM labeled “Scanner  
Driver and Document Management Utility”.  
• DeskTopBinder Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2)  
Describes installation of, and the operating environment for DeskTop-  
Binder Lite in detail. This guide can be displayed from the [Setup] dialog  
box when DeskTopBinder Lite is installed.  
• DeskTopBinder Introduction Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2)  
Describes operations of DeskTopBinder Lite and provides an overview of  
its functions. This guide is added to the [Start] menu when DeskTopBinder  
Lite is installed.  
• Auto Document Link Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2)  
Describes operations and functions of Auto Document Link installed with  
DeskTopBinder Lite. This guide is added to the [Start] menu when Desk-  
TopBinder Lite is installed.  
❖ Other manuals  
• PostScript 3 Supplement (PDF file - CD-ROM1)  
• Unix Supplement (Available from an authorized dealer, or as a PDF file on  
our Web site.)  
Note  
❒ The following software products are referred to using a general names:  
• DeskTopBinder Lite and DeskTopBinder Professional → DeskTopBinder  
• ScanRouter V2 Lite and ScanRouter EX Professional (optional) → the Scan-  
Router delivery software  
• SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client →  
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin/Client  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Manuals for This Machine......................................................................................i  
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................1  
Symbols .....................................................................................................................1  
1. Transmission Mode  
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later) .............................................................3  
Sender Settings......................................................................................................5  
Priority Transmission............................................................................................8  
Confidential Transmission....................................................................................9  
Polling Transmission...........................................................................................11  
Polling Transmission Clear Report...........................................................................13  
Polling Reception.................................................................................................14  
Polling Reserve Report ............................................................................................16  
Polling Result Report ...............................................................................................16  
2. Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
Displaying Confirmation of Transmission.........................................................18  
Canceling a Transmission ..................................................................................19  
Deleting a Destination .........................................................................................20  
Adding a Destination...........................................................................................21  
Changing the Transmission Time ......................................................................22  
Printing a File .......................................................................................................23  
Resending a File ..................................................................................................24  
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List).......................................25  
3. Communication Information  
Printing the Journal.............................................................................................27  
Journal .....................................................................................................................29  
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status).........................................31  
Checking the Reception Result (RX File Status) ..............................................32  
Displaying the Memory Status............................................................................33  
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File)...34  
Printing Received and Stored Documents ...............................................................34  
Deleting Received and Stored Documents ..............................................................35  
Printing a Confidential Message ........................................................................36  
Confidential File Report............................................................................................37  
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock......................................................38  
Personal Boxes....................................................................................................40  
Personal Boxes........................................................................................................40  
Printing Personal Box Messages .............................................................................41  
Information Boxes ...............................................................................................42  
Information Boxes ....................................................................................................42  
Storing Messages in Information Boxes...................................................................42  
Printing Information Box Messages .........................................................................44  
Deleting Information Box Messages ........................................................................45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
4. Other Transmission Features  
Handy Dialing Functions.....................................................................................47  
Chain Dial.................................................................................................................47  
(Example) 01133-1-555333...................................................................................47  
Redial.......................................................................................................................47  
Advanced Features..............................................................................................49  
SUB Code ................................................................................................................49  
SID Code...............................................................................................................50  
SEP Code ................................................................................................................50  
PWD Code.............................................................................................................51  
Transfer Request .....................................................................................................52  
With transfer requests set in the system settings..................................................55  
On Hook Dial ........................................................................................................56  
Manual Dial...........................................................................................................58  
Changing the Line Port .......................................................................................59  
Sub Transmission Mode .....................................................................................61  
Book Fax..................................................................................................................61  
Two-Sided Transmission (Double-Sided Transmission)..........................................62  
Standard Message Stamp........................................................................................64  
Sending an Auto Document .....................................................................................65  
Printing documents stored as Auto Documents ....................................................66  
Sending a Stored File...............................................................................................67  
Sending stored documents....................................................................................67  
Printing stored documents.....................................................................................70  
Stamp.......................................................................................................................72  
Transmission Options ..............................................................................................73  
Fax Header Print ...................................................................................................73  
Label Insertion.......................................................................................................73  
Reduced Image Transmission...............................................................................74  
Auto Reduce..........................................................................................................74  
Default ID Transmission ........................................................................................74  
Selecting transmission options for a single transmission ......................................75  
More Transmission Functions............................................................................77  
If Memory Runs Out While Storing an Original ........................................................77  
Parallel Memory Transmission.................................................................................77  
Checking the Transmission Result...........................................................................78  
Automatic Redial......................................................................................................78  
Batch Transmission..................................................................................................78  
Dual Access .............................................................................................................78  
Transmission with Image Rotation...........................................................................79  
Simultaneous Broadcast ..........................................................................................79  
JBIG Transmission...................................................................................................79  
Transmitting Journal by E-mail.................................................................................80  
Journal by E-mail...................................................................................................80  
Printed Report......................................................................................................81  
Memory Storage Report...........................................................................................81  
Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission) ..........................................81  
Communication Failure Report ................................................................................82  
Immediate TX Result Report (Immediate Transmission) .........................................82  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Reception Features  
Reception..............................................................................................................83  
Immediate Reception ...............................................................................................83  
Memory Reception...................................................................................................83  
Substitute Reception................................................................................................85  
Receiving messages unconditionally.....................................................................85  
Receiving messages according to parameter-specified settings...........................86  
Reception Functions ...........................................................................................87  
Transfer Station........................................................................................................87  
Transfer Result Report ..........................................................................................88  
Transfer Result Report (transfer request by e-mail)..............................................89  
Forwarding Received Documents............................................................................90  
Routing Received Documents with SUB Code ........................................................91  
Transferring Received Documents...........................................................................91  
SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax........................................................................92  
Routing E-mail Received via SMTP ......................................................................93  
JBIG Reception........................................................................................................95  
Auto Fax Reception Power-up .................................................................................95  
Printing Options...................................................................................................96  
Print Completion Beep .............................................................................................96  
Checkered Mark.......................................................................................................96  
Center Mark .............................................................................................................96  
Reception Time........................................................................................................97  
Two-Sided Printing...................................................................................................97  
180-Degree Rotation Printing................................................................................98  
Multi-copy Reception................................................................................................98  
Image Rotation.........................................................................................................99  
Combine Two Originals............................................................................................99  
Page Separation and Length Reduction ...............................................................100  
Reverse Order Printing ..........................................................................................100  
Page Reduction......................................................................................................101  
TSI Print (Transmitting Subscriber Identification Print) ..........................................101  
When There Is No Paper of the Correct Size.........................................................101  
Setting priority trays.............................................................................................102  
Just size printing..................................................................................................103  
Having Incoming Messages Printed on Paper from the Bypass Tray .................103  
Where Incoming Message are Delivered - Output Tray..................................105  
Specifying Tray for Lines........................................................................................105  
Tray Shift................................................................................................................105  
6. Fax via Computer  
Sending Fax Documents from Computers......................................................107  
Before Use .............................................................................................................108  
Installing the Software............................................................................................108  
Auto run program.................................................................................................108  
Installing individual applications ..........................................................................109  
Applications Stored on the CD-ROM .....................................................................109  
LAN-Fax Driver....................................................................................................109  
Address Book ......................................................................................................110  
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor...............................................................................110  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting LAN-Fax Driver Properties.........................................................................110  
Setting Print Properties........................................................................................110  
Making Settings for Option Configuration............................................................111  
Basic Transmission................................................................................................112  
Specifying options ...............................................................................................114  
Confirming Transmission Results by E-mail........................................................116  
LAN-Fax Result Report..........................................................................................118  
Printing and Saving................................................................................................118  
Editing Address Book.............................................................................................118  
Editing Fax Cover Sheets ......................................................................................121  
Creating a cover sheet ........................................................................................121  
Attaching a created cover sheet..........................................................................121  
LAN-Fax Operation Messages...............................................................................122  
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser .............................................123  
Viewing, Printing, and Deleting Received Fax Messages Using a Web Image Monitor ...123  
Viewing received fax messages using a Web browser .......................................123  
Printing fax information using a Web browser.....................................................124  
Deleting fax information using a Web browser....................................................124  
Programming Destination Information from Web Browser.....................................125  
Delivering Files Received by Fax .....................................................................127  
7. Simplifying the Operation  
Programs ............................................................................................................129  
Registering and Changing Keystroke Programs....................................................129  
Registering a priority function using a program...................................................130  
Changing a program name..................................................................................131  
Deleting a Program ................................................................................................131  
Using a Program ....................................................................................................132  
Using the Document Server..............................................................................133  
Storing a Document ...............................................................................................134  
Changing Information of Stored Documents..........................................................136  
Deleting a Stored Document..................................................................................138  
Managing Documents Saved in the Document Server from a Computer ..............139  
Using DeskTopBinder..........................................................................................139  
Using a Web browser ..........................................................................................139  
8. Facsimile Features  
Function List ......................................................................................................141  
Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)....................................................144  
Quitting Default Settings ........................................................................................144  
General Settings/Adjustment .................................................................................144  
Reception Settings.................................................................................................147  
E-mail Settings.......................................................................................................148  
IP-Fax Settings.......................................................................................................150  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Administrator Setting  
Administrator Tools List ...................................................................................155  
Using Administrator Settings ...........................................................................157  
Programming, Changing, and Deleting Standard Messages.................................157  
Storing, Changing, and Deleting an Auto Document .............................................158  
Deleting an Auto Document.................................................................................159  
Programming, Changing and Deleting a Scan Size...............................................160  
Deleting a scan size ............................................................................................161  
Printing Journal ......................................................................................................162  
Counters.................................................................................................................162  
Forwarding .............................................................................................................162  
Programming an End Receiver ...........................................................................163  
Quitting the forwarding function...........................................................................164  
Forwarding Mark..................................................................................................164  
Memory Lock..........................................................................................................165  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) ................................................................................165  
User Parameters....................................................................................................166  
Changing the User Parameters...........................................................................170  
Printing the User Parameter List .........................................................................171  
Special Senders to Treat Differently ......................................................................171  
Authorized Reception ..........................................................................................172  
Forwarding...........................................................................................................173  
Reception File Print Quantity...............................................................................173  
Print 2 Sided........................................................................................................173  
Memory Lock.......................................................................................................174  
Reception Reverse Printing.................................................................................174  
Paper Tray...........................................................................................................174  
Programming/Changing Special Senders ...........................................................174  
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special Sender .................................................178  
Deleting a Special Sender...................................................................................180  
Printing the Special Sender List ..........................................................................180  
Box Settings...........................................................................................................180  
Programming/changing Personal Boxes .............................................................181  
Deleting Personal Boxes .....................................................................................183  
Programming/changing Information Boxes .........................................................184  
Deleting Information Boxes .................................................................................185  
Programming/changing Transfer Boxes..............................................................186  
Deleting Transfer Boxes......................................................................................189  
Printing the Box List.............................................................................................190  
Transfer Report......................................................................................................190  
Programming a Confidential ID..............................................................................191  
Programming a Polling ID ......................................................................................192  
Programming a Memory Lock ID ...........................................................................192  
Selecting Dial/Push Phone.....................................................................................193  
Storing or Printing Received Documents ...............................................................193  
Reception Report e-mail......................................................................................194  
Setting a User for Viewing Received and Stored Documents................................195  
Menu Protection Settings.......................................................................................196  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10.Solving Operation Problems  
When an Error Report is Printed ......................................................................197  
Turning Off the Main Power / When a Power Failure Occurs ........................198  
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax ......................................................199  
Error Mail Notification.............................................................................................199  
Error Report (E-Mail)..............................................................................................199  
Server-Generated Error E-mail ..............................................................................199  
11.Appendix  
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone ......................201  
Connecting the Telephone Line .............................................................................201  
Selecting the Line Type..........................................................................................202  
Connecting the Optional Handset or an External Telephone.................................202  
Optional Equipment...........................................................................................204  
Expansion Memory (32MB: DIMM)........................................................................204  
Handset..................................................................................................................204  
Extra G3 Interface Unit ..........................................................................................204  
Specifications.....................................................................................................205  
Compatible Machines.............................................................................................207  
Acceptable Types of Originals ...............................................................................208  
Acceptable original sizes.....................................................................................208  
Paper size and scanned area..............................................................................208  
Original sizes difficult to detect...............................................................................210  
Maximum Values................................................................................................212  
INDEX....................................................................................................... 213  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Read This Manual  
Symbols  
In this manual, the following symbols are used:  
R WARNING:  
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in  
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-  
structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are in-  
cluded in “Safety Information”, General Settings Guide.  
R CAUTION:  
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-  
nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury  
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this  
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are included in “Safety In-  
formation”, General Settings Guide.  
* The statements above are notes for your safety.  
Important  
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be  
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.  
Preparation  
This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.  
Note  
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnor-  
mal operation.  
Limitation  
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,  
or conditions under which a particular function cannot be used.  
Reference  
This symbol indicates a reference.  
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.  
[
]
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.  
{
}
Keys built into the machine's control panel.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Transmission Mode  
Sending at a Specific Time (Send Later)  
Using this function, you can instruct  
Note  
the machine to delay transmission of  
❒ You can specify a time within 24  
your fax message until a specified lat-  
hours.  
er time. This allows you to take ad-  
❒ If the current time shown is not  
correct, change it. See “Timer Set-  
ting”, General Settings Guide.  
vantage of off-peak telephone  
charges without having to be by the  
machine at the time.  
❒ If the document is sent before the  
specified time, the Communication  
Result Report is printed and the job  
is completed.  
❒ For convenience, you can program  
the time when your phone charges  
become cheaper as the Economy  
Transmission Time. See p.146  
“Program Economy Time”.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the quick op-  
eration key allows you to omit step  
B. See p.144 “General Settings/Ad-  
justment”.  
If you have a non-urgent fax, select  
Send Later with Economy Transmis-  
sion when you scan it. Faxes will be  
queued in memory and sent during  
Economy Transmission Time.  
A Place the original, and then select  
Important  
the scan settings you require.  
❒
After the machine has been switched  
off for about one hour, all fax mes-  
sages stored in memory are lost. If  
messages are lost for this reason, a  
Power Failure Report is automati-  
cally printed when the operation  
switch is turned on. Use this report  
to identify lost messages.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
B Press [Transmission Mode].  
Limitation  
❒ This function is unavailable with  
Immediate Transmission. Use  
Memory Transmission.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
C Press [Send Later].  
D Enter the time (12 hour format)  
using the number keys, and then  
select [AM] or [PM]. Then, press  
[OK].  
1
The specified time is shown above  
the highlighted [Send Later].  
Note  
❒ Press [Economy Time] to specify  
the economy time.  
❒ When entering numbers small-  
er than 10, add a zero at the be-  
ginning.  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key be-  
fore pressing [OK], and then try  
again.  
❒ To cancel Send Later, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
that of step  
.
C
E Press [OK].  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
❒ To check the settings, press  
[Transmission Mode].  
F Specify a destination, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ You can cancel the transmission  
setup for Send Later. See p.19  
“Canceling a Transmission”.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sender Settings  
Sender Settings  
This function tells receivers the fax  
sender's identity.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
1
If the sender's e-mail address is regis-  
tered in the destination list, the send-  
er can receive an Immediate TX  
Result Report by e-mail.  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
Also, if you enable the Stamp Sender  
Name, the registered sender's name  
(user name) appears on the receiver's  
sheet, lists, or report.  
B Press [Transmission Mode].  
C Press [Sender Settings].  
D Select a sender.  
Note  
Preparation  
Before using this function, you  
must register senders in the desti-  
nation list and specify Use Name  
as [Sender]. See “Fax Destination”,  
General Settings Guide.  
Note  
❒ When user authentication is set,  
the user logged in is set as sender.  
An Immediate TX Result Report is  
sent to the logged-in user's e-mail  
address.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
Sender Settings. Quick Operation  
keys allow you to omit step B. See  
p.144 “General Settings/Adjust-  
ment”.  
❒ You can use communication man-  
agement report, etc. to check usage  
status by specified user. When  
user authentication is set, you can  
check usage by logged-in users.  
See p.162 “Printing Journal”.  
When User ID is set to sender, you  
can count the number of times of  
uses by each user. See “Authenti-  
cation Information”, General Set-  
tings Guide.  
❒ When a protection code for des-  
tination is set, the following  
screen appears. Enter the pro-  
tection code for destination us-  
ing the number keys, and then  
press [OK].  
A Place the original, and then select  
the necessary settings.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
E Confirm the selected sender, and  
When an E-mail address is  
Registered  
then press [OK].  
If the sender's e-mail address is  
registered you can specify whether  
or not to send the transmission re-  
sult by e-mail to the sender. If you  
enable this function, sent to the  
registered mail address.  
1
Note  
❒ When a user logs in with User  
ID, the Immediate TX Result Re-  
port is sent by e-mail to the  
logged-in user.  
F Select [On] or [Off] for the Stamp  
Sender Name.  
A Select [Yes] or [No] for the E-  
mail TX Results function.  
Printing on the Receiver's Sheet  
If you enable this function, the  
sender's name (user name) ap-  
pears on the receiver's sheet, lists,  
and report.  
G Press [OK].  
A Select [On] for the Stamp Send-  
er Name function.  
The display returns to that of Step  
.
C
Note  
❒ The selected sender's name ap-  
pears above [Sender Settings].  
The sender name is displayed in  
up to 14 characters, followed by  
an ellipsis (. . . ).  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sender Settings  
H Press [OK].  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
❒ To check the settings, press  
[Transmission Mode].  
1
I Specify the destination, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ To cancel the Sender Settings,  
cancel the transmission. See  
p.19 “Canceling a Transmis-  
sion”.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
Priority Transmission  
Documents you send with Memory  
Transmission are sent in the order  
they are scanned. Therefore, if several  
messages are queued in memory, the  
next document will not be sent imme-  
diately. However, by using this func-  
tion you can have your message sent  
before other queued messages.  
B Press [Transmission Mode].  
1
C Press [Priority TX], and then press  
[OK].  
Limitation  
❒ This function is not available with  
Immediate Transmission. If this  
function is selected, the machine  
automatically switches to Memory  
Transmission.  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
❒ To check the settings, press  
[Transmission Mode].  
Note  
❒ If there is already a message stored  
with this function or a transmis-  
sion in progress, your message will  
be sent after that message has been  
transmitted.  
D Specify the destination, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ Press [Change / Stop TX File] to  
cancel the transmission. See  
p.19 “Canceling a Transmis-  
sion”.  
A Place the original, and then select  
the scan settings you require.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Confidential Transmission  
Confidential Transmission  
If you want to limit who views your  
Note  
message, use this function. The mes-  
sage will be stored in memory at the  
other end and not printed until an ID  
is entered.  
❒ We recommend you program the  
Confidential ID in this machine be-  
forehand. See p.191 “Program-  
ming a Confidential ID”.  
1
❒ An ID can be any 4-digit number  
(except 0000).  
❒ If the destination machine is not of  
the same manufacturer, you can  
use Confidential Transmission  
with “SUB Code”. See p.49 “SUB  
Code”.  
A Place the original, and then select  
GFSINS0N  
the scan settings you require.  
There are two types of Confidential  
Transmission:  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
❖ Default ID  
It is not necessary to enter an ID  
when transmitting.  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
The other party can print the mes-  
sage by entering the Confidential  
ID programmed in their machine.  
B Press [Transmission Mode].  
❖ ID Override:  
Should you want to send a confi-  
dential message to a particular per-  
son at the other end, you can  
specify the Confidential ID that the  
receiver has to enter to see that  
message. Before you send the mes-  
sage, do not forget to tell the re-  
ceiver the ID that must be entered  
to print the message.  
C Press [Confidential TX].  
Limitation  
❒ The destination machine must be  
of the same manufacturer and  
have the Confidential Reception  
function.  
❒
The destination machine must have  
enough memory available.  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
Note  
D Depending on the Confidential  
Transmission type, use one of the  
following procedures:  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
1
❒
To cancel Confidential Trans-  
mission, press [Cancel]. The  
display returns to that of step  
.
C
E Press [OK].  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
Default ID  
❒ To check the settings, press  
[Transmission Mode].  
A Check that [Default ID] has been  
selected, and then press [OK].  
F Dial, and then press the {Start}  
Note  
key.  
❒
To cancel Confidential Trans-  
mission, press [Cancel]. The  
display returns to that of step  
Note  
❒ You can cancel the transmission  
setup for Confidential Trans-  
mission. See p.19 “Canceling a  
Transmission”.  
.
C
Override ID  
A Select [ID Override: ].  
B Enter the Confidential ID (4-  
digit number) using the num-  
ber keys, and then press [OK].  
“ID Override: ” and the entered  
Confidential ID are shown  
above the highlighted [Confiden-  
tial TX].  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Polling Transmission  
Polling Transmission  
Use Polling Transmission when you  
want to leave an original in the ma-  
chine memory for others to pick up.  
The message will be sent when the  
other party calls you up.  
❖ ID Override Transmission  
You must enter an Override Poll-  
ing ID unique to the transmission.  
This ID overrides the ID stored in  
the machine. The user must supply  
this ID when they poll your ma-  
chine. If the IDs match, the mes-  
sage is sent. Make sure in advance  
the other end knows the ID you are  
using.  
1
Limitation  
❒
❒
Polling Transmission is allowed only  
if the receiver's machine has the  
Polling Reception function.  
Usually, only machines of the same  
manufacturer that support Polling  
Reception can perform ID Polling  
Transmission. However, when the  
Information Box File function is  
used, and the other party's fax ma-  
chine supports Polling Transmis-  
sion and the SEP function, you can  
still carry out Polling Transmission  
with an ID. See p.42 “Information  
Boxes”.  
Preparation  
Before using ID Polling Transmis-  
sion, you must register a polling  
ID. See p.192 “Programming a  
Polling ID”.  
There are three types of Polling  
Transmission.  
❖ Free Polling Transmission  
It is not necessary to enter the Poll-  
ing ID during the procedure.  
Anybody can poll the message  
from your machine.  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax.  
Note  
❒ Free Polling and Default ID Trans-  
mission allow only one file to be  
stored in memory.  
❖ Default ID Transmission  
It is not necessary to enter the Poll-  
ing ID during the procedure.  
The message will only be sent if the  
Polling ID of the machine trying to  
poll your message is the same as  
the Polling ID stored in your ma-  
chine. Make sure in advance that  
both machines' Polling IDs are  
identical.  
Before using Default ID Transmis-  
sion, you need to program the Poll-  
ing ID. See p.192 “Programming a  
Polling ID”.  
❒ ID Override Polling Transmission  
allows a file to be stored in memo-  
ry for each ID; you can store up to  
400 files by changing IDs.  
❒ When setting using default values,  
you can set whether a Polling  
Transmission file is deleted in User  
Parameters. See p.166 “User Pa-  
rameters” (switch 11, bit 7). To  
save a file for frequent sending, set  
to “Standby (Save)”.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
❒ Polling Transmission Clear Report  
allows you to verify Polling Trans-  
mission has taken place. See p.13  
“Polling Transmission Clear Re-  
port”. If E-mail TX Results is pro-  
grammed in a Quick Operation  
key, you can select whether a re-  
port e-mail is sent after transmis-  
sion. The destination of this report  
can be selected from the e-mail ad-  
dresses in the destination list.  
D Depending on the Polling Trans-  
mission mode, use one of the fol-  
lowing procedures:  
1
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using this key allows  
you to omit step B. See p.144 “Gen-  
eral Settings/Adjustment”.  
Free Polling Transmission  
A Check that [Free Polling TX] is se-  
❒ The communication fee is charged  
lected.  
to the receiver.  
Default ID Transmission  
A Place the original, and then select  
the scan settings you require.  
A Select [Default ID TX].  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
ID Override Transmission  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
A Select [ID Override Transmission].  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
B Specify a 4-digit ID using the  
number keys and [A], [B], [C],  
[D], [E], and [F].  
B Press [Transmission Mode].  
C Press [Polling TX].  
Note  
❒ A Polling ID may be any four  
numbers (0 to 9) and charac-  
ters (A to F), except 0000 and  
FFFF.  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key,  
and then try again.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Polling Transmission  
E Press [Only Once] or [Save] to delete  
Polling Transmission Clear  
Report  
or save the file after transmission.  
Note  
❒ To delete the original immedi-  
ately after transmission, select  
[Only Once].  
This report allows you to verify Poll-  
ing Transmission has taken place.  
1
If E-mail TX Results is programmed  
in a Quick Operation key, you can  
have the report e-mail sent after  
transmission. See p.146 “Quick Oper-  
ation Key”.  
❒ To repeatedly send the original,  
select [Save].  
❒ To cancel Polling Transmission,  
press [Cancel]. The display re-  
turns to that of step  
.
C
Limitation  
❒ This report is not printed if the  
User Parameters are set to allow  
the stored originals to be repeated-  
ly sent (Save). See p.166 “User Pa-  
rameters” (switch 11, bit 7).  
F Press [OK].  
“pppppppppp” ap-  
pears.  
The type of Polling Transmission is  
shown above the highlighted [Poll-  
ing TX].  
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
03, bit 6).  
G Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To check the settings, press  
❒ You can have a portion of the sent  
image printed on the report with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
7).  
[Transmission Mode].  
H Press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ You can cancel the transmission  
setup for Polling Transmission.  
See p.19 “Canceling a Transmis-  
sion”.  
❒ You can check the result of Polling  
Transmission with the Journal. See  
p.27 “Printing the Journal”  
❒ To view the report without text  
disruption, select a font of even  
character width in your e-mail ap-  
plication's settings.  
❒ You can display a destination with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
4).  
❒ You can indicate the receiving par-  
ty's information with the User Pa-  
rameters. See p.166 “User  
Parameters” (switch 04, bit 5).  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
Polling Reception  
Use this function to poll a message  
from another terminal. You can also  
poll documents from many terminals  
with only one operation (use Groups  
and Keystroke Programs to fully ex-  
ploit this function).  
❖ ID Override Polling Reception  
You must enter an Override Poll-  
ing ID unique to this transmission.  
This ID overrides the one stored in  
this machine.  
1
Your machine will receive any  
messages waiting in the transmit-  
ting machine that have matching  
ID's. If no ID's match, any messag-  
es that do not require IDs are re-  
ceived (Free Polling).  
Limitation  
❒ Polling Reception requires that the  
other machine is capable of Polling  
Transmission.  
❒ Usually, you can only receive doc-  
uments with a Polling ID from ma-  
chines of the same manufacturer  
that support the polling function.  
However, if the other party's fax  
machine supports Polling Trans-  
missions and the SEP function, and  
also has stored IDs, you can still  
perform Polling Reception. See  
p.50 “SEP Code”.  
Preparation  
Before using ID Polling Transmis-  
sion, you must register a polling  
ID. See p.192 “Programming a  
Polling ID”.  
There are two types of Polling Recep-  
tion.  
❖ Default ID/Free Polling Reception  
Use this method for Free Polling or  
Default ID Polling. If the Polling ID  
is programmed in your machine,  
any messages waiting in the trans-  
mitting machine with the same ID  
are received. If the other machine  
does not have any messages wait-  
ing with the same Polling ID, any  
messages that do not require ID  
are received (Free Polling).  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax.  
Note  
❒ To receive a message sent by De-  
fault ID Polling Transmission or ID  
Override Polling Transmission, it  
is necessary to specify the same  
Polling ID as the sender's. Free  
Polling Transmission does not re-  
quire the same Polling ID.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Polling Reception  
❒ Polling Result Report allows you  
to verify Polling Reception has tak-  
en place. See p.16 “Polling Result  
Report”. If E-mail TX Results is  
programmed in a Quick Operation  
key, you can select whether a re-  
port e-mail is sent after reception.  
The destination of this report can  
be selected from the e-mail ad-  
dresses in the destination list.  
Note  
❒ To cancel Polling Reception,  
press [Cancel]. The display  
returns to that of step  
.
B
1
ID Override Polling Reception  
A Select [ID Override Polling Recep-  
tion].  
B Specify a 4-digit ID using the  
number keys and [A], [B], [C],  
[D], [E], and [F], and then press  
[OK].  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit step A. See p.144 “Gen-  
eral Settings/Adjustment”.  
A Press [Transmission Mode].  
“ID Override: ” and the entered  
Polling ID are shown above the  
highlighted [Polling RX].  
B Press [Polling RX].  
Note  
❒ A Polling ID may be any four  
numbers (0 to 9) and charac-  
ters (A to F), except 0000 and  
FFFF.  
C Depending on which method you  
are using, select one of the follow-  
ing procedures:  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
❒ To cancel Polling Reception,  
press [Cancel]. The display  
returns to that of step  
.
B
D Press [OK].  
Default ID/Free Polling Reception  
The standby display appears.  
E Dial, and then press the {Start}  
A Check that [Default ID / Free Poll-  
ing RX] is selected, and then  
press [OK].  
key.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transmission Mode  
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
Polling Reserve Report  
This report is printed after Polling Re-  
ception has been set up.  
1
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
03, bit 3).  
❒ You can have a destination dis-  
played with the User Parameters.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 04, bit 4).  
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
Polling Result Report  
This report is printed after a Polling  
Reception has been completed and  
shows its result.  
If E-mail TX Results is programmed  
in a Quick Operation key, you can se-  
lect whether a report e-mail is sent af-  
ter reception. See p.146 “Quick  
Operation Key”.  
Note  
❒ You can also check the result of a  
Polling Reception with the Journal.  
See p.27 “Printing the Journal”.  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
03, bit 4).  
❒ To view the report without text  
disruption, select a font of even  
character width in your e-mail ap-  
plication's settings.  
❒ You can display a destination with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
4).  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Checking and Canceling  
Transmission Files  
After you have pressed the {Start} key (after scanning originals), you can check  
and edit the destination or settings of Memory Transmission. You can also can-  
cel a transmission, change the settings of a transmission, print a stored file, print  
a list of stored files, and resend a file which the machine failed to transmit.  
• Memory Transmission  
• Internet Fax Transmission  
• Send Later  
• Sender Settings  
• Priority Transmission  
• Confidential Transmission  
• Polling Reception  
• Polling Transmission  
• Transfer Request  
Note  
❒ If there are no files being sent, or stored by Memory Transmission, [Change /  
Stop TX File] does not appear on the display.  
❒ You cannot check or edit a file being sent. Also a Confidential Transmission  
file or stored file to be printed as a report cannot be checked or edited.  
❒ There are cases when a destination may not be selected as the destination ap-  
pears as “*”, depending on the security settings.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
Displaying Confirmation of Transmission  
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].  
B Press [Check / Change Settings].  
C Select a file to check.  
Note  
2
❒ If multiple destinations were  
specified, only the destination  
selected first appears.  
❒ If multiple destinations were  
specified, only the number of  
unsent messages appears.  
D Confirm a transmission, and then  
press [Exit].  
E Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canceling a Transmission  
Canceling a Transmission  
You can cancel transmission of a file  
B Select a file whose transmission  
when the file is being sent, stored in  
memory, or fails to transmit. All the  
scanned data is deleted from memo-  
ry.  
you want to cancel.  
2
You can cancel a file for Memory  
Transmission. This function is useful  
to cancel a transmission when you  
notice a mistake in destination or  
with the originals after storing. To  
cancel Memory Transmission, search  
for the file to be canceled among the  
files stored in memory, and then de-  
lete it.  
Note  
❒ To display only the files being  
sent, press [Files under TX].  
Note  
❒ If multiple destinations were  
specified, only the number of  
unsent messages appears.  
❒ If you cancel a transmission while  
the file is being sent, some pages of  
your file may have already been  
sent and will be received at the  
other end.  
❒ If multiple destinations were  
specified, only one destination  
number appears. To display all  
destinations, press [Check /  
Change Settings].  
❒ If the transmission finishes while  
you are carrying out this proce-  
dure, transmission cannot be can-  
celed.  
C Press [Stop Transmission].  
The selected file is deleted.  
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].  
Note  
❒ To quit transmission cancel,  
press [Save].  
❒ To cancel another transmission,  
repeat from step  
.
B
D Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
Deleting a Destination  
You can delete destinations.  
D Press [Change] for the destination  
you want to delete.  
Note  
❒ If you delete a destination that is  
the only destination for a transmis-  
sion, the transmission is canceled.  
2
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].  
Note  
❒ Press  
to switch the destina-  
tion between fax number, Inter-  
net Fax address and IP-Fax  
address.  
B Press [Check / Change Settings].  
E
Press [Clear] to delete the destination.  
C Select the file from which you  
Note  
want to delete a destination.  
❒ Pressing [Clear] deletes by single  
digits the fax number or IP-Fax  
address entered using the num-  
ber keys. The destination speci-  
fied using destination keys or  
Internet Fax address can be en-  
tirely deleted at once by press-  
ing [Clear].  
F Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ To delete another destination,  
repeat from step  
.
C
G Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding a Destination  
Adding a Destination  
Note  
D Press [Add].  
❒ A destination cannot be added us-  
ing a destination list.  
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].  
2
Note  
❒ Press  
to switch the destina-  
tion between fax number, Inter-  
net Fax address and IP-Fax  
address.  
B Press [Check / Change Settings].  
E Specify the destination using the  
number keys or soft (on-screen)  
keys.  
C Select the file to which you want  
to add a destination.  
Note  
❒ To add e-mail address, press  
[Manual Input], and then specify  
the destination.  
❒ You can also program a SUB  
Code or SEP Code by pressing  
[Adv. Features].  
F Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ Repeat steps , if you want to  
C
add another destination.  
G Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
Changing the Transmission Time  
You can change the transmission time  
E Press [Change TX Time].  
specified with Send Later. See p.3  
“Sending at a Specific Time (Send  
Later)”.  
You can also delete the transmission  
time. If the transmission time is delet-  
ed, the file is transmitted immediate-  
ly.  
2
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].  
F Press [Clear], and then re-enter the  
transmission time using the num-  
ber keys or select [Economy Time],  
and then press [OK].  
B Press [Check / Change Settings].  
Note  
❒ If you select [Economy Time], the  
economy time already specified  
is entered. See p.144 “General  
Settings/Adjustment”.  
❒ If you press [Transmit Now], the  
file is transmitted immediately.  
However, if there is a file on  
standby, that file is sent first.  
C Select the file for which you want  
to change or cancel the transmis-  
sion time.  
G Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ Repeat from step , if you want  
C
to change another transmission  
time.  
H Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
D The recipient appears.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a File  
Printing a File  
If you want to check the contents of a  
file that is stored in memory and not  
yet sent, use this procedure to print it  
out.  
Note  
❒ If multiple destinations were  
specified, only the number of  
unsent messages appears.  
Note  
❒ If you want two-sided printing,  
2
❒ Confidential Transmission files are  
displayed, but cannot be printed.  
press [Print 2 Sided].  
❒ To cancel printing, press [Can-  
❒ You can also print files that have  
cel]. The display returns to that  
not been successfully transmitted.  
of step  
.
C
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].  
D Press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ To cancel printing after pressing  
the {Start} key, press [Stop Print-  
ing]. The display returns to that  
of step  
.
C
E Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
B Press [Print File].  
❒ Repeat from step , if you want  
C
to print another file.  
C Select the file you want to print.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
Resending a File  
Machine memory stores messages  
that could not be successfully trans-  
mitted using Memory Transmission.  
Use this procedure to resend these  
messages.  
C Select the file you want to resend.  
“TX failed” is displayed for files  
that could not be sent.  
2
Preparation  
You should select “Store for 24  
hours” for “Store a message that  
could not be transmitted” in User  
Parameters. See p.166 “User Pa-  
rameters” (switch 24, bit 0).  
Note  
Note  
❒ Files that could not be transmitted  
will be kept for either 24 or 72  
hours depending on how you pro-  
gram this function. See p.166 “User  
Parameters” (switch 24, bit 1).  
❒ If multiple destinations were  
specified, only the destination  
number appears.  
❒ If multiple destinations were  
specified, only the number of  
unsent messages appears.  
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].  
❒ To add a destination, press  
[Add], and then specify the des-  
tination.  
D Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To cancel transmissions, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
that of step  
.
C
B Press [Transmit Failed File].  
❒ Repeat from step  
to resend  
C
another file.  
E Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
Transmission starts.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX File List)  
Printing a List of Files in Memory (Print TX  
File List)  
Print this list if you want to find out  
C Press the {Start} key.  
which files are stored in memory and  
what their file numbers are. Knowing  
the file number can be useful (for ex-  
ample when erasing files).  
Note  
2
❒ To cancel printing after pressing  
the {Start} key, press [Stop Print-  
ing]. The display returns to that  
Note  
of step  
.
B
❒
The contents of a file stored in mem-  
ory can also be printed. See p.23  
“Printing a File”.  
D Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
A Press [Change / Stop TX File].  
B Press [Print List].  
Note  
❒ To cancel printing before press-  
ing the {Start} key, press [Can-  
cel]. The display returns to that  
of step  
.
B
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking and Canceling Transmission Files  
2
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Communication  
Information  
Printing the Journal  
The Journal contains information  
about the last 50 communications  
(maximum) made by your machine. It  
is printed automatically after every 50  
communications (receptions & trans-  
missions).  
❒ The sender name column of the  
Journal is useful when you need to  
program a special sender. See  
p.171 “Special Senders to Treat  
Differently”.  
❒ You can set whether the Journal is  
automatically printed after every  
50 communications in User Param-  
eters. See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 03, bit 7).  
You can also print a copy of the Jour-  
nal at any time by following the pro-  
cedure below.  
If the machine is installed with the  
optional extra G3 interface unit, you  
can print the Journal of each line type.  
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
Important  
❒ The contents of a Journal printed  
automatically are deleted after  
printing. Keep the journal if you  
require a record of transmissions  
and receptions. You can check a to-  
tal of 200 communications (recep-  
tions & transmissions) on the  
display.  
❒ You can set whether you print the  
Journal by line type. See p.166 “Us-  
er Parameters” (switch 19, bit 1).  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit steps A. See p.144  
“General Settings/Adjustment”.  
❖ All  
❒ Depending on security settings,  
Prints the results of communica-  
tions in the order made.  
the destination may not appear.  
A Press [Information].  
❖ Print per File No.  
Prints only the results of commu-  
nications specified by file number.  
❖ Print per User  
Prints the results of communica-  
tions by individual sender.  
Note  
❒ The setting on the machine can be  
changed so that user codes will be  
printed instead of user names. For  
more information, contact your  
service representative.  
B Press [Print Journal].  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Note  
C Select a printing mode.  
❒ Press [Cancel] if the user is  
not registered. The display  
returns to that of step  
.
B
C Press [OK] after checking the  
user name shown on the dis-  
play.  
Note  
❒ Press [Clear] to return to the  
previous screen if a wrong  
user name is selected.  
3
All  
D Press the {Start} key.  
A Select [All].  
Note  
Print per File No.  
❒ To cancel a file printing, press  
[Stop Printing]. The display re-  
A Select [Print per File No.].  
turns to that of step  
.
B
B Enter a 4-digit file number.  
E Press [Exit] twice.  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key,  
and then try again.  
Printing per User  
A Select [Print per User].  
B Select a user.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing the Journal  
Journal  
3
ADJ102S  
1. Printing date  
Shows the date and time when the report  
is printed.  
5. Other end  
❖ For fax destinations  
•
Shows the name (for display) pro-  
grammed by the other end.  
2. Programmed Fax Header  
Shows the sender name programmed for  
printing.  
•
Shows the programmed fax num-  
ber if the name (for display) has not  
been programmed.  
3. Date  
•
•
If neither name nor fax number has  
been programmed by the other  
end, an entered fax number or a  
name programmed in a destination  
list is shown for transmissions.  
Shows the transmission or reception  
date.  
4. Time  
Shows the transmission or reception start  
time.  
The space will be blank for recep-  
tions.  
Note  
❒ To prioritize a fax number or name  
programmed in the destination  
list, contact your service represen-  
tative.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
•
•
For IP-Fax transmissions and recep-  
tions  
After , and “T” for outgoing fax or  
“R” for ingoing fax, the communica-  
tion mode appears in alphabetical let-  
ters or symbols.  
❖ For Internet Fax destinations  
At time of transmission, it shows the  
e-mail address or name programmed  
in the destination list. At time of re-  
ception, it shows the e-mail address of  
the sender.  
At time of broadcasting transmission,  
it shows the number of destinations  
after the e-mail addresses or names of  
destination.  
For Folder receptions  
Shows (folder mark).  
7. Communication time  
Shows time taken for transmissions or re-  
ceptions.  
Note  
❒ When documents are transmitted  
from the computer to the machine,  
-- LAN-Fax --> appears. To check if  
the documents are sent to the re-  
ceiver, confirm the same File No.  
3
8. Number of pages  
Shows the number of pages transmitted  
or received.  
9. Communication result  
Shows the result of transmissions or re-  
ceptions.  
❖ For IP-Fax destinations  
Shows the IP-Fax destination or name  
programmed in the destination list.  
The Fax destination details appear on  
reception report.  
OK: All pages were properly transmitted  
or received. When Reception Notice is ac-  
tivated using the Internet Fax E-mail Op-  
tions, receipt of Reception Notice is  
shown.  
--: The Internet Fax was document sent to  
the mail server programmed in this ma-  
chine. (However , this does not mean the  
e-mail was delivered.) When using LAN-  
Fax, communication results from this  
machine to a computer.  
❖ For Folder destinations  
Shows the name programmed in the  
destination list for transmissions.  
6. Communication mode  
•
For fax transmissions and receptions  
After “T” for outgoing fax or “R” for  
ingoing fax, shows a communication  
mode. If the optional Extra G3 inter-  
face unit has been installed, “G3-1”,  
“G3-2”, “G3-3”, or “G3 Auto” will be  
shown.  
Error: A communication error occurred.  
D: Power was disconnected during com-  
munication. Not all fax messages were  
transmitted.  
•
For Internet Fax transmissions and re-  
ceptions  
10. User name  
Shows the sender's name.  
After , and “T” for outgoing e-mail  
or “R” for ingoing e-mail, the commu-  
nication mode appears in alphabetical  
letters or symbols. Outgoing e-mail  
set for Reception Notice of E-mail Op-  
tions bears a “Q”, whereas “A” ap-  
pears with reception confirmation e-  
mails.  
11. File number  
Shows file management numbers.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File Status)  
Checking the Transmission Result (TX File  
Status)  
You can browse a part of the Immedi-  
C Check the transmission results.  
ate TX Result Report on the display.  
Note  
❒ Only the transmission result of the  
last 200 communications (recep-  
tions & transmissions) are shown.  
3
❒ You can view sent fax messages  
and their lists, using a network  
computer Web Image Monitor. For  
details, see the Web Image Moni-  
Transmission results are dis-  
tor's Help.  
played, from the latest result  
❒ If a transmission is completed  
while you are using this function,  
the result will not appear. To view  
the latest result, exit TX File Status,  
and then try again.  
down, in groups of six.  
Note  
❒ When a fax is sent, “Destina-  
tion:” shows the Own Fax Num-  
ber or Fax Header information  
of a receiver. The e-mail address  
and name programmed in the  
destination list appears in the  
“To” field of the sent Internet  
Fax document. For a transmis-  
sion from a computer, “-- LAN-  
Fax -->” is shown.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit steps A. See p.144  
“General Settings/Adjustment”.  
A Press [Information].  
❒ Depending on security settings,  
the destination may appear as *.  
D Press [Exit] twice.  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
❒ When documents are transmit-  
ted from the computer to the  
machine, -- LAN-Fax --> ap-  
pears. To check if the docu-  
ments are sent to the receiver,  
confirm the same File No.  
B Select [TX File Status].  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Checking the Reception Result (RX File  
Status)  
You can browse a part of the Recep-  
C Check the reception results.  
tion Result Report on the display.  
Note  
❒ Only the reception result of the last  
200 communications (receptions &  
transmissions) are shown.  
3
❒ You can view received fax messag-  
es and their lists, using a network  
computer Web Image Monitor. For  
details, see the Web Image Moni-  
Reception results are displayed  
tor's Help.  
from the latest result in groups of  
❒ If a message is received while you  
are using this function, the result  
will not appear. To view the latest  
result, exit RX File Status, and then  
try again.  
six.  
Note  
❒
When a fax or IP-Fax is received,  
Transmission Station shows the  
sender's fax number or Fax  
Header information. The send-  
er's e-mail address appears in  
the “From” field of the received  
Internet Fax.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit steps A. See p.144  
“General Settings/Adjustment”.  
D Press [Exit] twice.  
A Press [Information].  
The standby display appears.  
B Select [RX File Status].  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displaying the Memory Status  
Displaying the Memory Status  
Use this function to display a summa-  
ry of current memory usage. Items  
shown are the percentage of free  
memory space, the number of re-  
ceived confidential messages, the  
number of files to be sent, the number  
of Memory Lock files and the number  
of received messages to be printed.  
• When sending to the Person-  
al Box. See p.41 “Printing  
Personal Box Messages”.  
❒ If you have made the machine  
save received messages on the  
hard disk, see “RX Print Stand-  
by File” on the display to check  
the number.  
3
A Press [Information].  
D Press [Exit] twice.  
The standby display appears.  
B Press [Memory Status].  
C Check the memory status.  
Note  
❒ “Others” will be displayed:  
•
When storing attachment files.  
See p.65 “Sending an Auto  
Document”.  
• For storing Reception Re-  
quest files. See p.52 “Transfer  
Station”.  
• When storing originals in the  
Information Boxes. See p.42  
“Storing Messages in Infor-  
mation Boxes”.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored  
Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File)  
You can print documents that are re-  
ceived and stored on the hard disk.  
You can also delete unwanted docu-  
ments.  
Printing Received and Stored  
Documents  
Use the following procedure to print  
documents saved on the hard disk.  
3
Note  
❒ This function allows you to print  
only received and stored docu-  
ments.  
❒ You cannot print and delete re-  
ceived documents using the Docu-  
ment Server function.  
❒ You can specify and print multiple  
documents. You can specify a max-  
imum of 30 documents at one time.  
Preparation  
Make a setting for received and  
stored documents before using this  
function. See p.193 “Storing or  
Printing Received Documents”.  
A Press [Information].  
Note  
❒ If you have selected to store re-  
ceived documents and specified an  
e-mail address for notification of  
receipt, fax reception notification  
can be sent to that e-mail address.  
See p.194 “Reception Report e-  
mail”.  
❒ You can store up to 400 received  
B Press [Print / Delete Stored RX File].  
documents on the hard disk.  
C Select a file to be printed, and  
❒ You can view, print received and  
stored documents using a Web Im-  
age Monitor or DeskTopBinder.  
See p.123 “Viewing Fax Informa-  
tion Using a Web Browser” or the  
DeskTopBinder's manuals and  
Help.  
then press [Print].  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing/Deleting Received and Stored Documents (Print/Delete Stored RX File)  
D
Select the printing mode, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
C
Select a file to be deleted, and then  
press [Delete].  
Note  
❒ To cancel printing, press [Can-  
cel]. The display returns to that  
of step  
.
C
❒ To delete the document after  
printing, press [Delete File after  
Printing].  
❒ To perform two-sided printing,  
press [Print on 2 Sides] before  
pressing the {Start} key.  
3
D Press [Yes].  
Note  
E Press [Exit] twice.  
❒ To cancel a deletion, press [No].  
The display returns to that of  
The standby display appears.  
step  
.
C
E Press [Exit] twice.  
Deleting Received and Stored  
Documents  
The standby display appears.  
Use the following procedure to delete  
documents stored on the hard disk.  
Note  
❒
You cannot delete a document while  
another person is previewing or  
printing it using a Web Image  
Monitor or DeskTopBinder.  
❒ You can specify and print multiple  
documents. You can specify a max-  
imum of 30 documents at one time.  
A Press [Information].  
B Press [Print / Delete Stored RX File].  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Printing a Confidential Message  
This function is designed to prevent  
A
Confirm that the Confidential File  
indicator is lit.  
unauthorized users from reading  
your messages. If someone sends you  
a message using Confidential Trans-  
mission, it is stored in memory but  
not automatically printed. To print  
the message you have to enter the  
Confidential ID Code. When your  
machine has received a confidential  
message, the Confidential File (i)  
indicator lights.  
3
B Press [Information].  
Preparation  
Before using this function, pro-  
gram your Confidential ID. See  
p.191 “Programming a Confiden-  
tial ID”.  
Important  
❒ If the main power switch is off  
more than one hour, all confiden-  
tial messages are deleted. When  
this happens, use the Power Fail-  
ure Report to identify which mes-  
sages have been deleted. See p.198  
“Turning Off the Main Power /  
When a Power Failure Occurs”.  
C Press [Print Confidential RX File].  
Note  
❒
If no confidential messages have  
been received, the message “No  
reception file.” is shown.  
Press [Exit].  
Limitation  
❒ You must program the Confiden-  
tial ID for Confidential Reception  
to work.  
D Enter a 4-digit Confidential ID  
using the number keys, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax.  
Note  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit steps B. See p.144  
“General Settings/Adjustment”.  
The Confidential ID differs de-  
pending on the Sender's specifica-  
tions.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
              
              
Printing a Confidential Message  
Note  
Confidential File Report  
❒ You must enter the Confidential  
ID programmed in this ma-  
chine, if the received file has no  
Confidential ID.  
When this function is turned on, this  
report is printed whenever your ma-  
chine receives a confidential message.  
❒ You must enter the Confidential  
ID programmed by the sender.  
Confirm the sender's Confiden-  
tial ID in advance.  
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 0).  
❒ If the Confidential IDs or Per-  
sonal Confidential IDs do not  
match, the message “No recep-  
tion file under specified  
Confidential ID.” appears.  
Press [Exit] to cancel the opera-  
tion, and then check the Confi-  
dential ID or Personal  
Confidential ID with the other  
party, and then try again.  
3
❒ You can display a destination with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
4).  
E Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
-If you cannot print confidential  
files even if the Confidential  
File (i) indicator is lit.  
The Confidential File indicator also  
lights if the machine received a mes-  
sage with a SUB Code. Check the Per-  
sonal Boxes.  
Note  
❒ Print from the Personal Box, when  
a file has been sent from another  
party with a SUB Code attached.  
See p.41 “Printing Personal Box  
Messages”.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock  
This is a security function designed to  
prevent unauthorized users from  
reading your messages. If Memory  
Lock is switched on, all received mes-  
sages are stored in memory and are  
not automatically printed. To print  
the messages, you have to enter the  
Memory Lock ID Code. When your  
machine has received a message with  
Memory Lock, the Confidential File  
(i) indicator blinks.  
❒ You can also apply a Memory Lock  
to messages that come only from  
certain senders. See p.174 “Pro-  
gramming/Changing Special  
Senders”.  
❒ Messages received by Polling Re-  
ception are automatically printed  
even if this function is switched on.  
3
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit steps B. See p.144  
“General Settings/Adjustment”.  
Preparation  
Before using this function, pro-  
gram your Memory Lock ID. See  
p.192 “Programming a Memory  
Lock ID”.  
A
Confirm that the Confidential File  
indicator is blinking.  
Before using this function, set  
Memory Lock to On. See p.174  
“Memory Lock”.  
Important  
❒ If the main power switch is turned  
off for more than an hour, all mes-  
sages protected by Memory Lock  
will be deleted. In that case, the  
Power Failure Report will be print-  
ed so you can confirm which mes-  
sages have been deleted. See p.198  
“Turning Off the Main Power /  
When a Power Failure Occurs”.  
B Press [Information].  
Note  
❒ If Memory Lock and received doc-  
ument storage are both set to on,  
Memory Lock is unavailable and  
received documents become  
stored documents. For details, see  
p.193 “Storing or Printing Re-  
ceived Documents” and p.34  
“Printing/Deleting Received and  
Stored Documents (Print/Delete  
Stored RX File)”.  
C Press [Print Memory Lock].  
Note  
❒ If no messages were received  
while Memory Lock was  
switched on, the message “No  
reception file.” is shown.  
Press [Exit] .  
❒ Even when Memory Lock is avail-  
able, if free memory is insufficient,  
reception is not possible.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing a File Received with Memory Lock  
D Enter a 4-digit Memory Lock ID  
with the number keys, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
3
Note  
❒ If the Memory Lock ID does not  
match, the message “Speci-  
fied code does not corre-  
spond to programmed Memory  
Lock ID.” appears. Press [Exit]  
and retry after checking the  
Memory Lock ID.  
E Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Personal Boxes  
• To be able to receive messages into  
a Personal Box you must inform  
the sender of the SUB Code pro-  
grammed for that Personal Box  
and ask them to send the message  
using SUB Code Transmission  
with that SUB Code. See p.49 “SUB  
Code”.  
Preparation  
Before using this function, set the  
Personal Box in advance. See p.181  
“Programming/changing Person-  
al Boxes”.  
Personal Boxes  
3
• When messages have been re-  
ceived into Personal Boxes, the  
Confidential Reception/Memory  
Lock indicator lights and the Con-  
fidential File Report is printed. See  
p.37 “Confidential File Report”.  
This function lets you set up the machine  
so that incoming messages addressed to  
certain users are stored in memory in-  
stead of being printed out immediately.  
Each user must be assigned a SUB  
Code (Personal Code) that has been  
designated as a Personal Box before-  
hand. When the other party sends their  
message, they specify the SUB Code of  
the receiver. When the message is re-  
ceived, it is stored in the Personal Box  
with the matching SUB Code. In order  
to print a received message.  
• If a receiver is assigned, the deliv-  
ered document is deleted.  
• If a receiver is not assigned, print  
these messages. See p.41 “Printing  
Personal Box Messages”.  
❖ SUB Code and SEP Code  
SUB Code and SEP Code are IDs  
consisting of up to 20 digits, and  
can include numbers, #, *, and  
spaces. To use this function, you  
must program a box and SUB/SEP  
Code beforehand. The other party  
can send messages to, and retrieve  
stored messages from, this box us-  
ing the code.  
This enables several individuals or  
departments to share a single fax ma-  
chine yet be able to differentiate be-  
tween messages. Furthermore, if you  
specify a receiver for the Personal Box,  
instead of being stored in memory, in-  
coming messages with this SUB Code  
appended are forwarded directly to  
the destination you specify. You can  
specify a fax number, e-mail address  
or IP-Fax destination as the receiver.  
See p.181 “Programming/changing  
Personal Boxes” for details on pro-  
gramming receivers.  
Note  
❒ This function is not available when  
you have set received documents  
to be delivered to the network de-  
livery server.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personal Boxes  
When a password is required  
Printing Personal Box  
Messages  
The display appears, when the se-  
lected Personal Box password is  
set in advance.  
Follow these steps to print a message  
that has been received into a Personal  
Box.  
Note  
❒ The password is programmed  
in “Administrator Tools”. See  
p.181 “Programming/chang-  
ing Personal Boxes”.  
Note  
❒ If you print a Personal Box mes-  
sage, it is deleted.  
3
A Enter the password, and then  
A Make sure that the Confidential  
press [OK].  
File indicator is lit.  
B Press [Information].  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
❒
To cancel entering a password,  
press [Cancel]. The display  
returns to that of step  
.
D
E Press the {Start} key.  
C Press [Print Personal Box File].  
Note  
D Select the box with the message  
❒ To stop printing, press [Stop  
you want to print.  
Printing]. The display returns to  
that of step  
F Press [Exit].  
Note  
.
D
❒ To print a message in another  
Personal Box, refer to step  
and then try again.  
,
D
G Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
Information Boxes  
• You can check the contents of In-  
formation Boxes with “Store / De-  
lete / Print Information Box File”.  
See p.44 “Printing Information Box  
Messages”.  
Preparation  
Before using this function, set the  
Information Box in advance. See  
p.184 “Programming/changing  
Information Boxes”.  
• You can set a password for Infor-  
mation Boxes in advance. A pass-  
word can be set in “Administrator  
Setting”. See p.184 “Program-  
ming/changing Information Box-  
es”.  
Information Boxes  
3
Use the Information Box function to  
set up the machine as Document  
Server. By scanning documents into  
Information Boxes, other parties can  
receive these messages whenever  
they request them.  
Storing Messages in  
Information Boxes  
Follow these steps to store a message  
in an Information Box.  
Note  
❒
One Information Box stores one file.  
❒ The stored file is not deleted auto-  
matically. If you want to delete a  
stored file, see p.45 “Deleting In-  
formation Box Messages”.  
• You can program documents for  
this function with “Store / Delete  
/ Print Information Box File”. See  
p.42 “Storing Messages in Infor-  
mation Boxes” .  
A Press [Information].  
• For other parties to be able to re-  
trieve a message programmed in  
an Information Box, you need to  
inform them of the SEP Code as-  
signed to that Information Box.  
• When an SEP Code Polling Recep-  
tion request is made by another  
party, the SEP Code they specify is  
matched against the SEP Codes  
programmed in that Information  
Boxes. If a code matches, the mes-  
sage stored in the Information Box  
is sent to the other party automati-  
cally. See p.50 “SEP Code”.  
B Press [Store / Delete / Print Information  
Box File].  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information Boxes  
C Select the box in which you want  
D Place the original, and then select  
to store the file.  
the scan settings you require.  
3
Note  
Note  
❒
When there are pre-programmed  
files, a file mark is displayed at  
the end of the Box Name.  
❒ You can also select the follow-  
ing settings:  
• Book Fax  
❒ A message is displayed, when  
selecting a box with a file stored  
in it. Press [Yes], when changing  
the file name. The file stored  
originally will be overwritten.  
• 2 Sided Original (The option-  
al ADF is required.)  
• Stamp (The optional ADF is  
required.)  
Reference  
When a password is required  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
A Enter the password, and then  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
press [OK].  
E Press the {Start} key.  
The machine starts to scan the orig-  
inal.  
To stop scanning, press [Stop Scan-  
ning]. The display returns to that of  
step  
.
C
F Press [Exit].  
Note  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
❒ To store a message in another  
Information Box, return to step  
.
C
❒ To cancel entering a pass-  
G Press [Exit].  
word, press [Cancel]. The dis-  
The standby display appears.  
play returns to that of step  
.
C
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
When a password is required  
Printing Information Box  
Messages  
A Enter the password, and then  
press [OK].  
Follow these steps to print a message  
stored in an Information Box.  
A Press [Information].  
3
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
B Press [Store / Delete / Print Information  
Box File].  
❒ To cancel entering a pass-  
C Press [Print File].  
word, press [Cancel]. The dis-  
play returns to that of step  
.
D
D Select the box that contains the  
stored file you want to print.  
E Press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ If you want two-sided printing,  
press [Print 2 Sided] before press-  
ing the {Start} key.  
❒ To stop printing before pressing  
the {Start} key, press [Cancel].  
The display returns to that of  
step  
.
D
❒ To stop printing after pressing  
the {Start} key, press [Stop Print-  
ing]. The display returns to that  
Note  
❒ You cannot select a box that has  
no stored file.  
of step  
.
D
F Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ Repeat from step to print an-  
D
other stored file in the box.  
G Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information Boxes  
Note  
Deleting Information Box  
Messages  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
Follow these steps to delete a file  
stored in an Information Box.  
❒ To cancel entering a pass-  
word, press [Cancel]. The dis-  
A Press [Information].  
play returns to that of step  
.
D
E Press [Delete].  
Note  
3
❒ To stop deleting, press [Do not  
Delete]. The display returns to  
that of step  
F Press [Exit].  
Note  
.
D
B Press [Store / Delete / Print Information  
Box File].  
❒ Repeat from step to delete an-  
D
other stored file in another box.  
C Press [Delete File].  
G Press [Exit].  
D Select the box that contains the  
The standby display appears.  
stored file you want to delete.  
When a password is required  
A Enter the password, and then  
press [OK].  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication Information  
3
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Other Transmission Features  
Handy Dialing Functions  
Chain Dial  
Redial  
This allows you to compose a tele-  
phone number from various parts,  
some of which may be stored in  
Quick Dials and some of which may  
be entered using the number keys.  
The machine stores the last 10 desti-  
nations specified in each transmission  
method. This function saves time  
when you are sending to the same  
destination repeatedly, as you do not  
have to enter the destination again.  
Limitation  
Limitation  
The following kinds of destinations  
are not stored:  
❒ You cannot use this function with  
Internet Fax transmission.  
❒
Note  
• Quick Dials  
• Group Dials  
❒ The total number of digits that can  
be entered is up to 128 using desti-  
nation keys and number keys.  
• Destinations dialed as Receiv-  
ing Stations for Transfer Re-  
quest  
❒ For Memory Transmission and Im-  
mediate Transmission, insert a  
pause between parts of a number.  
For On Hook Dial and Manual Di-  
al, no pause is needed.  
• Forwarding terminal of the Sub-  
stitute Reception  
• Destinations dialed using the  
external telephone  
❒ The Advanced Features function  
programmed in the destination list  
is unavailable.  
• Destinations dialed by Redial  
(regarded as already stored in  
memory)  
(Example) 01133-1-555333  
• Second and later destinations  
broadcasted to  
Assume that 01133 is stored in a  
Quick Dial key.  
❒ To redial a fax number, do not dial  
any numbers before you press the  
{Pause/Redial} key. If you press the  
{Pause/Redial} key after entering  
numbers using the number keys, a  
pause will be entered instead.  
A Place the original, and then select  
the scan settings you require.  
B Press the Quick Dial key that is  
programmed “01133”.  
Note  
C Press the {Pause/Redial} key.  
❒ You can specify the Internet Fax  
destination and IP-Fax using with  
the Redial function. Select to use  
this function before pressing [Man-  
ual Input].  
D Enter {1}, {5}, {5}, {5}, {3}, {3},  
{3} using the number keys.  
E Press the {Start} key.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
A Place the original, and then select  
the scan settings you require.  
B Press the {Pause/Redial} key.  
4
C Select the destination you want to  
redial to.  
Note  
❒ Now that the date and time the  
original was read appears as a  
key, select by pressing it.  
❒ When you press [ProgDest], you  
can register a selected recipient  
in the destination list. See p.39  
“Registering Entered Destina-  
tions to the Address Book”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Features  
Advanced Features  
B Enter the fax number of a destina-  
SUB Code  
tion or an IP-Fax destination.  
Normally you can only use Confiden-  
tial Transmission to send messages to  
fax machines of the same manufactur-  
er that have the Confidential Recep-  
tion function. See p.9 “Confidential  
Transmission”. However, if the other  
machine supports a similar function  
called “SUB Code”, you can send fax  
messages to the other party using this  
method instead.  
C Press [Adv. Features].  
4
Limitation  
D Press [SUB Code].  
❒ A SUB Code cannot be used with  
E Press [TX SUB Code].  
Internet Fax.  
F Enter a SUB Code, and then press  
Note  
[OK].  
❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long.  
❒ You can enter numbers, *, #, and  
spaces to program an ID.  
❒ Make sure the number of digits in  
the ID matches the specification of  
the machine to which you are  
sending.  
❒ You can store IDs in destination  
lists and Programs. See “Fax Desti-  
nation”, General Settings Guide. See  
p.129 “Registering and Changing  
Keystroke Programs”.  
“SUB Code” appears one line  
above [Adv. Features] on the dis-  
play.  
❒ Messages you send using this  
function are marked “SUB” on all  
reports.  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and then  
try again.  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax.  
A Place the original, and then select  
G To enter a password, press [Pass-  
the scan settings you require.  
word (SID)].  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
H Enter the password with the num-  
ber keys, and then press [OK].  
I Press [Exit].  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
J Press the {Start} key.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
Other Transmission Features  
Note  
Limitation  
❒ If you use Immediate Transmis-  
sion and the fax machine at the  
destination does not support  
the SUB Code function, a mes-  
sage will appear on the display  
to inform you of this. When this  
happens, press [OK] to cancel  
the transmission.  
❒ A SEP Code cannot be used with  
Internet Fax.  
Note  
❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long.  
❒ Make sure the number of digits in  
the ID matches the one set on the  
machine to which you are sending.  
❒ You can enter numbers, *, #, and  
SID Code  
spaces to program an ID.  
❒ You can store IDs in destination  
lists and Programs. See “Fax Desti-  
nation”, General Settings Guide. See  
p.129 “Registering and Changing  
Keystroke Programs”.  
There are times when you may want  
to use an “SID” (Sender ID) when  
sending confidential faxes with the  
SUB Code function.  
4
Note  
❒ Messages you receive using this  
function are marked “SEP” on all  
reports.  
❒ The ID can be up to 20 digits long.  
❒ You can enter numbers, *, #, and  
❒ This function is not available with  
spaces to program an ID.  
Internet Fax.  
❒ You can store IDs in destination  
lists and Programs. See p.129  
“Registering and Changing Key-  
stroke Programs”. See “Fax Desti-  
nation”, General Settings Guide.  
A Enter the fax number of a destina-  
tion or an IP-Fax destination.  
B Press [Adv. Features].  
❒ Messages you send using this  
function are marked “SID” on all  
reports.  
SEP Code  
Normally you can only use Polling  
Reception to receive faxes from ma-  
chines that have the Polling Reception  
function and the same manufacturer.  
However, if a machine of another  
manufacturer supports Polling Re-  
ception, you can receive fax messages  
from the other party using this meth-  
od instead.  
C Press [SEP Code].  
D Press [RX SEP Code].  
You can receive messages that have  
the same SEP Code as the SEP Code  
you entered.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Features  
E Enter a SEP Code, and then press  
K Press [Default ID / Free Polling RX],  
[OK].  
and then press [OK].  
“SEP Code” appears one line  
above [Adv. Features] on the dis-  
play.  
Note  
❒ To cancel Polling RX, press [Can-  
cel]. The display returns to that  
4
of step  
.
J
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and then  
try again.  
L Press [OK].  
The standby display appears.  
M Press the {Start} key.  
F To enter a password, press [Pass-  
word (PWD)].  
PWD Code  
G Enter the password using the  
There are times you may want to use  
a password when receiving faxes by  
polling using the SEP Code function.  
number keys, and then press [OK].  
H Press [Exit].  
Note  
I Press [Transmission Mode].  
❒ The password can be up to 20 dig-  
its long.  
❒ You can enter numbers, *, #, and  
spaces as a password.  
❒ You can store IDs in destination  
lists and Programs. See “Fax Desti-  
nation”, General Settings Guide. See  
p.129 “Registering and Changing  
Keystroke Programs”.  
❒
Messages you send using this func-  
tion are marked “PWD” on all re-  
ports.  
J Press [Polling RX].  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
• Program each Transfer Station  
number in this machine (Re-  
questing Party) and in the  
Transfer Station itself. See p.190  
“Transfer Report”.  
Transfer Request  
Transfer Request allows fax machines  
that have this function to automati-  
cally transfer incoming messages to  
multiple fax destinations. This func-  
tion helps you save costs when you  
send the same message to more than  
one place in a distant area, and saves  
time since many messages can be sent  
in a single operation.  
• Program the same Polling ID in  
both this machine (Requesting  
Party) and the Transfer Station.  
See p.192 “Programming a Poll-  
ing ID”.  
• To send a Transfer Request by  
fax, the Transfer Station must be  
a fax machine of the same man-  
ufacturer and have the Transfer  
Station function.  
The diagram below may make the  
concept clearer.  
4
• To send a Transfer Request by e-  
mail, Transfer Station must be a  
fax machine of the same manu-  
facturer that supports Internet  
Fax.  
• To send a Transfer Request by  
IP-Fax, the Transfer Station  
must be a fax machine that sup-  
ports IP-Fax and made by the  
same manufacturer.  
GFTRRQ1E  
The following terminologies are used  
in this section:  
• You cannot use Transfer Re-  
quest without programming the  
fax number of the Requesting  
Party in a Quick Dial or Speed  
Dial.  
❖ Requesting Party  
The machine where the message  
originates.  
•
The Receiving Station's fax num-  
ber must be programmed in the  
Transfer Station's Quick Dial,  
Speed Dial or Group Dial.  
❖ Transfer Station  
The machine that forwards the in-  
coming message to another desti-  
nation.  
Note  
❖ Receiving Station  
❒ You can specify up to 500 Transfer  
The facsimile or computer that re-  
ceived the message from the  
Transfer Station.  
Stations in a Transfer Request.  
❒ You can have up to 30 End Receiv-  
ers per Transfer Station. If you  
specify a Transfer Station's Group,  
the Group counts as a single re-  
ceiver.  
Preparation  
Before you can use this function,  
you must make the following  
preparations:  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Features  
❒ When a Transfer Request is sent by  
e-mail, as soon as the Transfer Sta-  
tion completes transfer to all Re-  
ceiving Stations, it sends back a  
Transfer Result Report by e-mail.  
See p.89 “Transfer Result Report  
(transfer request by e-mail)”.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
B Specify a Transfer Station.  
❒ When a Transfer Request is sent by  
e-mail to a computer or facsimile  
without the Transfer Request func-  
tion, that machine receives it as or-  
dinary e-mail. It does not transfer  
the message nor send an error re-  
port back to the Requesting Party.  
To send Transfer Request by e-  
mail, use a Transfer Station that  
supports Internet Fax and has the  
Transfer Station function.  
Note  
❒ Enter directly or use a destina-  
tion list to specify the fax num-  
ber, e-mail address, or IP-Fax  
destination of the Transfer Sta-  
tion.  
4
❒ If you make a mistake, press the  
{Clear/Stop} key, and then try  
again.  
❒ When a Transfer Request is sent  
by e-mail, e-mail options can be  
set. See steps and on p.57  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit steps C. See p.144  
“General Settings/Adjustment”.  
B
C
“Sending Internet Fax Docu-  
ments”, Facsimile Reference <Ba-  
sic Features>.  
A Place the original, and then select  
Reference  
any scan settings you require.  
p.35 “Entering a Fax Number”,  
Facsimile Reference <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
Note  
❒ When using a Transfer Request  
by e-mail, documents are sent at  
“Detail” resolution, even if you  
have specified “Fine”. To send a  
document at “Super Fine” or  
“Fine”, configure the Full Mode  
when registering the destina-  
tions in the Address Book. See  
p.55 “T.37 Full Mode”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>.  
p.36 “Entering an E-mail Ad-  
dress”, Facsimile Reference <Basic  
Features>  
p.37 “Entering an IP-Fax Desti-  
nation”, Facsimile Reference <Ba-  
sic Features>  
p.40 “Using Destination Lists”,  
Facsimile Reference <Basic Fea-  
tures>  
❒ When using a Transfer Request  
by e-mail, documents are sent at  
A4 width. Documents larger  
than A4 are reduced to A4  
width. If the receiver is in com-  
pliance with the T.37 full mode,  
documents are sent at the width  
specified in the Address Book.  
See p.55 “T.37 Full Mode”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>.  
C Press [Adv. Features].  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
D Select [Transfer Req.].  
Speed Dial  
E Press [Receiving Station].  
F Specify a Receiving Station.  
A Select [qp Speed Dial].  
B Enter the number of the Speed  
Dial code.  
For example, to select the num-  
ber stored in Speed Dial 12 of  
the Transfer Station, enter: {1}  
{2}.  
Group Dial  
A Select [qpp Group Dial].  
4
Note  
B Enter the number of the Group  
❒ You cannot enter Receiving Sta-  
tion numbers directly. The  
numbers must be stored in des-  
tination lists, Speed Dial, or  
Groups in the Transfer Sta-  
tion(s). To specify a Receiving  
Station, use the procedure de-  
scribed below.  
number.  
For example, to select the num-  
ber stored in Group Dial 04 of  
the Transfer Station, enter: {0}  
{4}.  
G To specify another Receiving Sta-  
tion, press [Add].  
❒ To cancel the Transfer Request,  
Note  
press [Cancel]. The display re-  
❒ Press [U Prev.] or [T Next] to see  
the Receiving Stations already  
entered. You can select a Re-  
ceiving Station from this list and  
remove it by pressing [Clear] or  
the {Clear/Stop} key.  
turns to that of step  
.
E
Destination List  
A Select [q Quick Dial].  
B Enter the registration number  
of the destination list where  
the Receiving Station is stored.  
H When you have specified all the  
Receiving Stations, press [OK].  
For example, to select the regis-  
tration number stored in Quick  
Dial 01 of the Transfer Station,  
enter: {0} {1}.  
I Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ You can enter up to five dig-  
its.  
The Transfer Stations and Receiv-  
ing Stations are displayed.  
J Press the {Start} key.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Features  
With transfer requests set in the system  
settings  
-Setting Multistep Transfer  
Program a Transfer Station in a desti-  
nation list. When receiving a Transfer  
Request that specifies the same Re-  
ceiving Station as programmed in the  
destination list, this machine sends a  
Transfer Request to the programmed  
Transfer Station. This function allows  
fax messages to be transferred via  
multiple stations and makes fax mes-  
sage transfer more efficient.  
You can program a Quick Dial key  
with Transfer Station and/or Receiv-  
ing Station using the Transfer Re-  
quest function in the System Settings.  
See “Registering the Transfer Re-  
quest”, General Settings Guide.  
A Place the original down, and then  
select the desired settings.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
You can program up to 30 Receiving  
Stations per Transfer Station. For  
more information, contact your ser-  
vice representative.  
4
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
B Press the key programmed with  
Transfer Request.  
C Press the {Start} key.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
On Hook Dial  
The On Hook Dial function allows  
you to dial while hearing tone from  
the internal speaker. You can send a  
fax checking the connection.  
Note  
❒ If you want to cancel this oper-  
ation, press the {On Hook Dial}  
key again.  
Limitation  
C Dial.  
❒ This function is not available for  
the optional extra G3 interface  
unit, Internet Fax and IP-Fax.  
Note  
❒
This function is unavailable in some  
countries.  
4
❒ If an Immediate TX Result Report  
(Immediate Transmission) is print-  
ed, On Hook Dial transmission re-  
sults are not mentioned on the  
report.  
The machine immediately dials the  
destination.  
Note  
A Place the original, and then select  
❒ You can adjust the volume of  
the On-hook sound by pressing  
[Higher] or [Lower] in the upper  
right-hand corner of the dis-  
play. The volume can also be  
preprogrammed in “General  
Settings and Adjustments”. See  
p.83 “Adjusting the Volume”,  
Facsimile Reference <Basic Fea-  
tures> and p.144 “General Set-  
tings/Adjustment”.  
the scan settings you require.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
B Press the {On Hook Dial} key.  
❒ If you make a mistake, press the  
{On Hook Dial} or {Clear Modes}  
key, and then return to step  
.
B
D When the line is connected and  
you hear a high-pitched tone,  
press the {Start} key.  
The transmission starts.  
Note  
You will hear a low tone from the  
internal speaker.  
❒ After transmission, the machine  
returns to standby mode.  
❒ If you want to cancel a transmis-  
sion, press the {Clear/Stop} key,  
and then remove the originals.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On Hook Dial  
-External Telephone On Hook  
Dial  
If you have an external telephone on  
the fax machine, you can speak with  
the other party when you hear a  
voice. If you hear a voice before press-  
ing the {Start} key, pick up the exter-  
nal telephone and tell the receiver  
you want to send a fax message (ask  
them to switch to facsimile mode).  
4
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
Manual Dial  
The optional handset or an external telephone is required.  
Pick up the optional handset or the  
handset of the external telephone and  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, replace  
the external telephone, and then  
try again from step  
dial. When the line is connected and  
you hear a high-pitched tone, press  
the {Start} key to send your fax mes-  
sage. If, on the other hand, you hear a  
voice at the other end, continue con-  
versation as normal.  
.
B
D When the line is connected and  
you hear a high-pitched tone,  
press the {Start} key to send your  
fax message.  
Limitation  
The transmission starts.  
4
❒ This function is not available for  
the optional extra G3 interface  
unit, Internet Fax and IP-Fax.  
Note  
❒ If you hear a voice, tell the re-  
ceiver that you want to send  
them a fax message (ask them to  
switch to facsimile mode).  
❒ If Immediate TX Result Report  
(Immediate Transmission) is print-  
ed, the result of a transmission  
with Manual Dial is not mentioned  
in the report.  
E Replace the handset.  
After transmission, the standby  
display appears.  
A Place the original, and then select  
the scan settings you require.  
Note  
Reference  
❒ If you want to cancel a transmis-  
sion, press the {Clear/Stop} key,  
and then remove the originals.  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
B Pick up the handset.  
You will hear a tone.  
C Dial.  
The machine immediately dials the  
destination.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Line Port  
Changing the Line Port  
The optional extra G3 interface unit is required.  
When the extra G3 interface unit is in-  
stalled, you can connect to a maxi-  
mum of three ports.  
❖ Multi-port  
When the extra G3 interface unit is  
installed, communications can  
take place simultaneously through  
three lines at once.  
Note  
❒ When you install the extra G3 in-  
terface unit, you can specify the  
line port home position from  
“General Settings and Adjust-  
ment”. See p.144 “General Set-  
tings/Adjustment”.  
The following list shows protocol  
combinations available for each  
line type.  
Option  
Available Available pro-  
line types tocol combi-  
nations  
4
❒ When sending a fax, you can select  
the line port if dialing with the  
number keys or Chain Dial.  
Without  
option  
PSTN  
G3  
Extra G3  
interface  
unit  
PSTN+PS  
TN  
G3+G3  
❖ G3  
G3 is selected after power up or  
when the machine is reset. If you  
install the extra G3 interface unit,  
you can select “G3-1”, “G3-2”,  
“G3-3”, or “G3 Auto”depending  
on the number of the installed unit.  
Extra G3  
interface  
unit + Ex- PSTN  
tra G3 in-  
terface  
PSTN +  
PSTN +  
G3 + G3 + G3  
unit  
Note  
❒ A maximum of three simulta-  
neous communications are pos-  
sible. You cannot perform three  
Immediate Transmissions si-  
multaneously.  
❒ If three communications are in  
progress, the display shows the  
first communication that was  
initiated  
A Press [Select Line].  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
B Select the line you want to use.  
When one optional extra G3 unit is  
installed.  
Note  
❒ If you select “G3 Auto”, the ma-  
chine will use any available line.  
This increases efficiency.  
4
C Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub Transmission Mode  
Sub Transmission Mode  
A Place the original on the exposure  
glass, and then select the scan set-  
tings you require.  
Book Fax  
Use to send book originals from the  
exposure glass. Pages are scanned in  
the order shown below.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
B Press [Sub TX Mode].  
4
Limitation  
❒ Place the original on the exposure  
glass. You cannot use the optional  
ADF.  
❒ Depending on paper sizes avail-  
able in the destination machine,  
the message may be reduced when  
printed at the other end.  
C Press [Book Fax].  
D Select the size of the original.  
Note  
❒ You can have bound originals  
scanned as left or right page first.  
You can set which page (left or  
right) the machine scans first as de-  
fault with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
06, bit 6).  
❒ When using the Internet Fax func-  
tion, documents are sent at A4  
width. Documents larger than A4  
are reduced to A4 width. See p.13  
“Placing Originals”, Facsimile Ref-  
erence <Basic Features>. If the re-  
ceiver is T.37 full mode compliant,  
documents are sent at the width  
specified in the Address Book. See  
p.55 “T.37 Full Mode”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>.  
Note  
❒ To cancel this mode, press [Can-  
cel]. The display returns to that  
of step  
.
C
❒ If you select A3, the original will  
be sent using Image Rotation  
Transmission. See p.79 “Trans-  
mission with Image Rotation”.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
E Select [From First Page] or [From  
Two-Sided Transmission  
(Double-Sided Transmission)  
Second Page], and then press [OK].  
The optional ADF is required.  
Use this function to send two-sided  
originals.  
Note  
❒ Originals placed on the exposure  
glass cannot be sent.  
The selected original size is shown  
❒ The front and back of the scanned  
original will be printed in order on  
separate sheets at the other end.  
The orientation of alternate sheets  
may be reversed at the other end. If  
you want to print the original with  
the same orientation at the other  
end, specify the “Original Posi-  
tion” and “Page Opening Orienta-  
tion”.  
above the highlighted [Book Fax].  
Note  
4
❒ Select [From First Page] to send a  
book original from the first  
page.  
❒ Select [From Second Page] if you  
want to send a cover letter as the  
first page.  
❒ To cancel this mode, press [Can-  
cel]. The display returns to that  
of step  
.
C
F Press [OK].  
G
Specify a destination, and then press  
the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ When sending more than one  
page, place the originals indi-  
vidually, one after the other,  
pressing the {Start} key after  
each page.  
❒ After the last original has been  
scanned, press [#].  
❒ If [#] is not pressed, the ma-  
chine will automatically start  
sending the documents, 60 sec-  
onds after the last original has  
been scanned.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub Transmission Mode  
B Press [Sub TX Mode].  
GHPY030E  
C Press [2 Sided Original].  
See p.79 “Transmission with Im-  
age Rotation”  
D Specify the original position.  
Check the orientation of the placed  
document, and then press  
.
❒ This function is only available with  
4
or  
Memory Transmission.  
❒ This function is only available with  
the ADF.  
❒ You can confirm whether both  
sides were properly scanned using  
the Stamp function. See p.72  
“Stamp”.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the quick op-  
eration keys allows you to omit  
step B. See p.144 “General Set-  
tings/Adjustment”.  
Note  
❒ Make sure that the specified  
original position matches the  
orientation of originals loaded  
in the ADF.  
A Place the original in the ADF, and  
then select the scan settings you  
require.  
E Specify the page opening orienta-  
tion from [Top to Top] or [Top to Bot-  
tom].  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
F Specify the transmission mode  
from [2 Sided from 1st Page] or [1 Sid-  
ed for 1st Page], and then press  
[OK].  
Standard Message Stamp  
Use this function to stamp a standard  
message at the top of the first original  
sent.  
There are four types of standard mes-  
sages: “Confidential”, “Urgent”,  
“Please phone”, and “Copy to corres ...”  
You can also program other messages.  
Note  
❒ While this function is in use, the  
third line of the Label Insertion is  
not printed. See p.75 “Program-  
ming the Label Insertion”.  
The selected original position and  
page opening orientation are  
shown above the highlighted [2  
Sided Original].  
4
❒ When there is an image around the  
area where the standard message  
is to be stamped, that image is de-  
leted.  
Note  
❒ To cancel this mode, press [Can-  
cel]. The display returns to that  
❒ To program a standard message,  
use the Program / Change / De-  
lete Standard Message function.  
See p.157 “Programming, Chang-  
ing, and Deleting Standard Mes-  
sages”.  
of step  
.
C
❒ Select [2 Sided from 1st Page] to  
send a two-sided original from  
the first page.  
❒ Select [1 Sided for 1st Page] if you  
want to send a cover letter as the  
first page.  
A Place the originals, and the select  
the scan settings you require.  
G Press [OK].  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
H Specify the destination, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
B Press [Sub TX Mode].  
C Press [Std. Message].  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub Transmission Mode  
Note  
D Select the standard message to be  
stamped, and then press [OK].  
❒ You can attach one Auto Docu-  
ment to each transmission.  
❒ You can store up to 6 Auto Docu-  
ments. See p.158 “Storing, Chang-  
ing, and Deleting an Auto  
Document”.  
❒ Files with Auto Documents are  
sent by Memory Transmission.  
❒ When sending an Auto Document  
with other files, the Auto Docu-  
ment is sent first.  
The selected standard message is  
shown above the highlighted [Std.  
Message].  
❒ Storing Auto Documents reduces  
the amount of free memory slight-  
ly. Unless you delete the docu-  
ment, free memory will not return  
to 100%.  
4
Note  
❒ To cancel the selection, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
that of step  
.
C
❒ You can print an Auto Document  
currently stored in memory. See  
p.66 “Printing documents stored  
as Auto Documents”.  
❒ Programmed standard messag-  
es are shown in the keys.  
❒ The machine cannot stamp mul-  
tiple standard messages.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the quick op-  
eration keys allows you to omit  
step B. See p.144 “General Set-  
tings/Adjustment”.  
E Press [OK].  
F Specify the destination, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
A Place the original, and then select  
Sending an Auto Document  
the scan settings you require.  
If you often send a particular page to  
people (for example a map, a stan-  
dard attachment, or a set of instruc-  
tions), store that page in memory as  
an Auto Document. This saves res-  
canning every time you want to send  
it.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
Note  
You can fax an Auto Document by it-  
self, or attach it to a standard fax mes-  
sage.  
❒ When you fax an Auto Docu-  
ment, start from step  
.
B
Preparation  
You need to register an Auto Doc-  
ument. See p.158 “Storing, Chang-  
ing, and Deleting an Auto  
Document”.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
B Press [Sub TX Mode].  
Printing documents stored as Auto  
Documents  
This function is used for printing doc-  
uments stored as Auto Documents.  
This function is very convenient as it  
can be used for checking the contents  
of stored files.  
A Press [Sub TX Mode].  
C Press [Auto Document].  
D
Select an Auto Document file, and  
then press [OK].  
4
When you fax an Auto Document  
by itself, press [TX Stored File (AD)  
Only], and then press [OK].  
B Press [Auto Document].  
C Select an Auto Document file to  
be printed, and then press [Print  
File].  
The selected file name is shown  
above the highlighted [Auto Docu-  
ment].  
Note  
❒ Programmed Auto Documents  
are shown in the keys.  
Note  
❒ To cancel the Auto Document,  
❒ To cancel the Auto Document,  
press [Cancel]. The display re-  
press [Cancel]. The display re-  
turns to that of step  
.
C
turns to that of step  
.
B
E Press [OK].  
D Press the {Start} key.  
F Specify the destination, and then  
Once printing is completed, the  
display returns to that of step  
press the {Start} key.  
.
B
Note  
❒ To cancel printing after pressing  
the {Start} key, press [Stop Print-  
ing]. The display returns to that  
of step  
.
B
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub Transmission Mode  
Note  
E Press [Cancel].  
❒ Received fax documents are stored  
and categorized as stored recep-  
tion files. See p.34 “Printing/De-  
leting Received and Stored  
Documents (Print/Delete Stored  
RX File)”.  
Note  
❒ You can also send Auto Docu-  
ments. See p.65 “Sending an  
Auto Document”.  
F Press [OK].  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the quick op-  
eration keys allows you to omit  
step A. See p.144 “General Set-  
tings/Adjustment”.  
The standby display appears.  
Sending a Stored File  
Use this function to send documents  
stored in the Document Server. You  
can specify and send multiple docu-  
ments, and also send them with  
scanned originals all at once.  
4
Sending stored documents  
The machine sends documents stored  
in the Document Server.  
You can also print stored originals  
with [Print File]. See p.70 “Printing  
stored documents”.  
The documents stored in the Docu-  
ment Server can be sent again and  
again until they are deleted. Once  
sent, documents are stored in the  
Document Server. Therefore, you can  
send them in just one operation with-  
out having to set your originals again.  
Limitation  
❒
You cannot use the following trans-  
mission methods:  
• Free Polling Transmission  
• Default ID Transmission  
• ID Override Transmission  
• Immediate Transmission  
• Parallel Memory Transmission  
• On Hook Dial  
Preparation  
Store the documents to be sent in  
advance. You can program a pass-  
word for this function. You can  
change the user names, file names,  
and passwords of stored docu-  
ments. See p.133 “Using the Docu-  
ment Server”, and p.136  
“Changing Information of Stored  
Documents”.  
• Manual Dial  
Note  
❒ You can specify and print multiple  
documents. You can specify a max-  
imum of 30 documents at once.  
❒ The machine can send a total of  
1,000 pages in one operation.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
❒ The specified documents are sent  
with the scan settings made when  
they were stored.  
Specifying documents from the  
file list  
A Press [U Prev.] or [T Next] to dis-  
A Press [Sub TX Mode].  
play the documents to be sent.  
B Select the file.  
Specifying documents from the  
User Name  
A Select [Search by User Name].  
B Press [Select Stored File].  
4
C Select the documents to be sent.  
B Select the user name of the pro-  
grammed document, and then  
press [OK].  
Note  
❒ When multiple documents are  
selected, they are sent in the or-  
der of selection.  
❒ Press [TX Order] to arrange the  
order of the documents to be  
sent.  
Note  
❒ Press [File Name] to place the  
documents in alphabetical or-  
der.  
❒
To search by user name, press  
[Non-programmed Name], and  
then enter the user name.  
Partial matching is used  
when searching for a user  
name. See p.172 “Using Par-  
tial matching”.  
❒ Press [User Name] to place the  
documents in order by pro-  
grammed user name.  
❒ Press [Date] to place the docu-  
ments in order of programmed  
date.  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
C Select the file to be sent.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub Transmission Mode  
E When you want to add your origi-  
nals to stored documents and  
send them all at once, press [ROr-  
igi. + Stored File] or [Stored file + R  
Origi.].  
Specifying documents from the  
file name  
A Select [Search by File Name].  
B Enter the name of the docu-  
ment to be sent, and then press  
[OK].  
4
When sending only stored docu-  
ments, proceed to step  
.
F
Note  
❒ When [ROrigi. + Stored File] is  
pressed, the machine sends the  
originals and then stored files.  
When [Stored file + R Origi.] is  
pressed, the machine sends the  
stored files and then originals.  
❒ The added originals are not  
stored.  
Note  
❒
Partial matching is used when  
searching for a file name.  
F Press [OK] twice.  
Note  
C Select the file to be sent.  
❒ To add an original to stored  
documents, place the original,  
and then select any scan settings  
you require.  
D If you select a document with a  
password, enter the password,  
and then press [OK].  
G Specify the destination, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
If the document does not have a  
password, proceed to step  
.
E
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
❒ Press [File Name] to place the  
documents in alphabetical or-  
der.  
Printing stored documents  
Use this function to print documents  
stored in the Document Server.  
❒ Press [User Name] to place docu-  
ments in order of programmed  
user name.  
Note  
❒ Only documents stored using the  
❒ Press [Date] to place the docu-  
ments in order by the pro-  
grammed date.  
facsimile function can be printed.  
❒ You can print documents saved  
from the copy or the printer func-  
tion with the Document Server.  
You cannot print documents saved  
from the scanner function with this  
mode.  
❒ To see details of the selected  
document, press [Detail]. To re-  
turn to the display in Step  
press [Select File].  
,
C
4
❒ You can also print the first page  
only to check the content of the  
original.  
❒ You can specify and print multiple  
documents. You can specify a max-  
imum of 30 documents at one time.  
A Press [Sub TX Mode].  
Selecting a document from file list  
A Select the file.  
Note  
❒ Press [U Prev.] or [T Next] to  
display the document to be  
sent.  
B Press [Select Stored File].  
Specifying a document from the  
User Name  
C Select the document to be printed.  
A Select [Search by User Name].  
Note  
❒ The documents stored using the  
facsimile function appear on the  
display.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub Transmission Mode  
B Press the user name of the doc-  
ument to be sent, and then  
press [OK].  
D If you select a document with a  
password, enter the password,  
and then press [OK].  
Note  
If the document does not have a  
password, proceed to step  
.
❒
To search by user name, press  
[Non-programmed Name], and  
then enter the user name.  
E
4
E Press [Print File] or [Print 1st Page].  
When [Print File] is pressed, the ma-  
chine prints all the pages. When  
[Print 1st Page] is pressed, the ma-  
chine prints only the first page.  
C Select the file.  
Specifying a document from the  
file name  
Limitation  
A Press [Search by File Name].  
❒ When [Print 1st Page] is selected,  
originals larger than A4 size are  
printed after they are reduced  
to A4 size.  
❒ The machine can print up to 30  
files using the Print 1st Page  
function.  
Note  
❒ To print both sides, press [Print 2  
B Enter the file name to be print-  
Sided].  
ed, and then press [OK].  
❒
To cancel printing, press [Cancel].  
F Press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒
When only the first page is print-  
ed, the file name is printed at the  
top of the paper.  
❒ To cancel printing after pressing  
the {Start} key, press [Stop Print-  
ing].  
Note  
❒ Partial matching is used to  
G Press [OK] twice.  
search for the file name.  
The standby display appears.  
C Select the file.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
❒ A paper jam during Parallel Mem-  
ory Transmission may cause the  
transmission to be failed even if  
stamping is performed.  
Stamp  
The optional ADF is required.  
❒ You cannot turn the Stamp func-  
tion on or off while a document is  
being scanned.  
When sending a fax message using  
the ADF, the machine can stamp a cir-  
cle mark at the bottom of the original.  
When sending a two-sided docu-  
ment, the document is marked at the  
bottom of the front page and top of  
the rear page. This stamp indicates  
that the original has been successfully  
stored in memory for Memory Trans-  
mission, or successfully sent by Im-  
mediate Transmission.  
A Place the original, and then select  
the scan settings you require.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
4
B Press [Sub TX Mode].  
Note  
❒ Stamp only works when scanning  
from the ADF.  
C Press [Stamp], and then press [OK].  
Note  
❒ When the stamp starts getting  
lighter, replace the cartridge. See  
“Replacing the Stamp Cartridge”,  
General Settings Guide.  
❒
To cancel the stamp, press [Stamp]  
again before pressing [OK].  
D Specify the destination, and then  
❒ If a page was not stamped even  
though the Stamp function is  
turned on, you need to resend that  
page.  
press the {Start} key.  
❒ If you use this function often, you  
can set the default in General Set-  
tings and Adjustment so that this  
function is always on. In this case,  
Stamp can easily be turned off for  
any single transmission by press-  
ing [Stamp]. See p.144 “General Set-  
tings/Adjustment”.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub Transmission Mode  
❒
You can select whether or not dates,  
fax header names, file numbers, or  
page numbers are printed by  
changing their respective User Pa-  
rameters. (switch 18, bit 3, 2, 1, 0)  
See p.166 “User Parameters”.  
Transmission Options  
This section describes various func-  
tions that you can switch on and off  
for any particular transmission, fol-  
lowing the procedures given here.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. See p.144 “General  
Settings/Adjustment”.  
In addition, if you frequently use a  
certain option configuration, you can  
change the default home position (on  
or off) of each option.  
❒ In the USA, law requires that your  
fax number be included in the Fax  
Header. Program the fax number  
and switch on Fax Header Print  
with User Parameters. See, p.166  
“User Parameters”.  
Fax Header Print  
In some cases, you may want the oth-  
er party to receive an unmarked copy  
of your original. To do this, switch  
Fax Header off.  
4
Label Insertion  
When the Fax Header is set to “ON”,  
the stored name is printed on the re-  
ceiver's paper.  
With this function you can have the  
receiver name printed on the message  
when it is received at the other end.  
The name will be printed at the top of  
the page and will be preceded by  
“To”. You can also cause the text pro-  
grammed as a standard message to be  
printed. See p.157 “Programming,  
Changing, and Deleting Standard  
Messages”.  
You can store two Fax Headers; “First  
Name” and “Second Name”.  
For example, if you store your depart-  
ment name in one and your organiza-  
tion name in the other, you could use  
the first when sending internal faxes  
and the second for external faxes.  
Important  
Note  
❒ In the USA, the Fax Header must  
contain the telephone number of  
the line your machine is connected  
to. It will be printed on the header  
of every page you send. Required  
in the USA.  
❒ When there is an image around the  
area where the Label is to be print-  
ed, that image is deleted.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. See p.144 “General  
Settings/Adjustment”.  
Note  
❒ If you used the number keys to  
specify the receiver, the first head-  
er name will be printed on the re-  
ceiver's paper.  
❒
You can program fax header names  
using the Program Fax Informa-  
tion function.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
Important  
Reduced Image Transmission  
❒ If you turn this function off, the  
scale of the original is maintained  
and some parts of the image may  
be deleted when printed at the oth-  
er end.  
Using this function, your message is  
sent at a reduced size (93%) with a  
blank margin on the left.  
4
Default ID Transmission  
Note  
❒ This function is unavailable with  
Immediate Transmission, or speci-  
fied transmission of a stored docu-  
ment.  
If you turn this function on, transmis-  
sion will only take place if the desti-  
nation's Polling ID is the same as  
yours. This function can stop you ac-  
cidentally sending information to the  
wrong place.  
❒ Image Rotation is unavailable with  
this function.  
Preparation  
Auto Reduce  
You need to register a polling ID  
beforehand. See p.192 “Program-  
ming a Polling ID”.  
When this function is turned on, if the  
receiver's paper is smaller than the  
paper you are sending on, the mes-  
sage is automatically reduced to fit  
onto the paper available at the other  
end.  
Limitation  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax.  
Note  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. See p.144 “General  
Settings/Adjustment”.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sub Transmission Mode  
Selecting transmission options for a  
single transmission  
Programming the Fax Header  
Print  
A Press [On] for Fax Header Print.  
A Place the original, and then select  
the scan settings you require.  
Note  
❒ Press [Off] if you do not want  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
to print the sender name.  
Programming the Label Insertion  
p.30 “Scan Settings”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
A Press [Programmed Name] for La-  
bel Insertion.  
B Press [Sub TX Mode].  
Note  
4
❒ Press [Off] if you do not want  
to insert a destination.  
Programming the Reduced  
Image Transmission  
A Press [On] in for Reduced Im-  
age TX.  
C Select [Options].  
Note  
D Select options to be set up.  
❒ Press [Off] if you do not want  
to do a reduced transmission.  
Programming the Auto Reduce  
A Press [On] for Auto Reduce.  
Note  
❒ Press [Off] if you do not want  
to use the Auto Reduce func-  
tion.  
Programming the Default ID  
Transmission  
A Press [On] for Default ID TX.  
Note  
❒ Press [Off] if you do not want  
to use ID transmission.  
Note  
❒
To close the option settings, pro-  
ceed to step  
E Press [OK] twice.  
.
E
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
F Specify the destination, and then  
press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ To cancel the option settings,  
press [Cancel].  
4
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More Transmission Functions  
More Transmission Functions  
• When you store an original for  
Memory Transmission while  
another communication is in  
progress  
If Memory Runs Out While  
Storing an Original  
If you run out of memory while stor-  
ing an original (free space reaches  
0%), the message “Memory is full.  
Cannot scan more. Transmitting  
only scanned pages. Transmit-  
ting only scanned pages.” is dis-  
played.  
• When two or more destinations  
are specified  
• When you send only an Auto  
Document  
• When an original is placed on  
the exposure glass, and then  
sent  
4
Press [Exit] to transmit stored pages  
only.  
•
When you send messages stored  
in the Document Server  
Note  
Note  
❒ In default, scanned pages are sent.  
To change the settings to delete  
scanned pages, contact your ser-  
vice representative.  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
07, bit 2).  
❒ Standard Memory Transmission  
may be used instead of Parallel  
Memory Transmission depending  
on the optional equipment in-  
stalled if there is not enough free  
memory left.  
Parallel Memory Transmission  
This function dials while the original  
is being scanned. Standard Memory  
Transmission stores the original in  
memory, then dials the destination.  
Parallel Memory Transmission al-  
lows you to quickly determine  
whether a connection was made. In  
addition, this function scans the orig-  
inal faster than Immediate Transmis-  
sion. This is useful when you are in a  
hurry and need to use the original for  
another purpose.  
❒ If you use this function, the Memo-  
ry Storage Report will not be print-  
ed.  
❒ If the {Clear/Stop} key is pressed, an  
original will jam or memory will  
run out during Parallel Memory  
Transmission stops. The Commu-  
nication Result Report is printed  
and files are deleted.  
Limitation  
❒
When using Parallel Memory Trans-  
mission, only the original pages are  
printed without automatically  
printing the total number of origi-  
nals in “Fax Header Print”.  
❒ Standard Memory Transmission is  
used instead of Parallel Memory  
Transmission in the following cas-  
es:  
• When the line is busy and could  
not be connected to  
• With Send Later  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
Checking the Transmission  
Result  
Batch Transmission  
If you send a fax message by Memory  
Transmission and there is another fax  
message waiting in memory to be  
sent to the same destination, that  
message is sent along with your orig-  
inal. Several fax messages can be sent  
with a single call, thus eliminating the  
need for several separate calls. This  
helps save communication costs and  
reduce transmission time.  
• Turn the Immediate TX Result Re-  
port on if you want a report to be  
printed after every successful  
transmission. See p.81 “Communi-  
cation Result Report (Memory  
Transmission)”.  
• If you leave the Immediate TX Re-  
sult Report off, the report will not  
be printed after every transmis-  
sion. However, if a transmission  
fails, a Communication Failure Re-  
port will be printed instead. See  
p.81 “Communication Result Re-  
port (Memory Transmission)” and  
p.82 “Communication Failure Re-  
port”.  
Fax messages for which the transmis-  
sion time has been set in advance are  
sent by batch transmission when that  
time is reached.  
4
Limitation  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax and IP-Fax.  
• You can also check the transmis-  
sion result by examining the Jour-  
nal. See p.27 “Printing the  
Journal”.  
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
14, bit 2).  
• You can either print or scroll  
through the Journal on the display.  
See p.31 “Checking the Transmis-  
sion Result (TX File Status)”.  
❒ The originals to be transmitted at a  
specific time will be sent at that  
time.  
❒ If fax memory is overloaded, mes-  
sages may not be sent in the order  
they were scanned.  
Automatic Redial  
If a fax message could not be sent be-  
cause the line was busy or an error oc-  
curred during transmission, the line  
is switched to another at five-minute  
intervals and redial is attempted up  
to five times.  
Dual Access  
The machine can scan other messages  
into memory even while sending a  
fax message from memory, receiving  
a message into memory, or automati-  
cally printing a report. Since the ma-  
chine starts sending the second  
message immediately after the cur-  
rent transmission ends, the line is  
used efficiently.  
If redialing fails after four redials, the  
machine cancels the transmission and  
prints an Communication Result Re-  
port or Communication Failure Re-  
port. See p.82 “Communication  
Failure Report”. and p.81 “Communi-  
cation Result Report (Memory Trans-  
mission)”.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More Transmission Functions  
This results in a shorter overall trans-  
mission time.  
Note  
❒
Note that during Immediate Trans-  
mission or when in User Tools  
mode, the machine cannot scan an  
original.  
Transmission with Image  
Rotation  
Generally, place A4, 81/2"×11" origi-  
nals in the landscape orientation (L).  
If you place an A4, 81/2"×11" original  
in the portrait orientation (K), the  
image will be sent rotated by 90°. Pro-  
viding the receiver has A4, 81/2"×11"  
landscape paper (L), the message  
will be printed the same size as the  
original.  
Note  
❒ A maximum of four simultaneous  
transmissions (including LAN) are  
possible.  
4
❒ When using the optional extra G3  
interface unit, if you set the line se-  
lection as “G3 Auto” beforehand,  
the machine will use whichever G3  
line is not busy. This increases effi-  
ciency.  
Note  
❒ This function is unavailable with  
Immediate Transmission.  
❒ When Image Rotation is used, all  
messages are sent by normal Mem-  
ory Transmission.  
JBIG Transmission  
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image  
Experts Group) compression, you can  
send photographic originals faster  
than with other methods of compres-  
sion.  
❒ This function is unavailable when  
using Mixed Original Sizes.  
Simultaneous Broadcast  
Reference  
p.31 “Original Type”, Facsimile Ref-  
erence <Basic Features>  
The optional extra G3 interface unit is re-  
quired.  
The Standard Broadcast function  
sends faxes one at a time to multiple  
destinations in the order of specified  
destinations.  
Limitation  
❒ You can only use this function  
with telephone line.  
The Simultaneous Broadcast func-  
tion, however, can simultaneously  
send faxes to multiple destinations  
using different lines.  
❒ This function requires that the oth-  
er party's fax machine has both the  
JBIG function and ECM function  
(G3 communication only).  
Note  
❒ If ECM is turned off, JBIG Trans-  
mission is unavailable. See p.165  
“ECM (Error Correction Mode)”.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
Journal by E-mail  
Transmitting Journal by E-mail  
If the setting is made so that the Jour-  
nal is transmitted as e-mail, it is trans-  
mitted to the e-mail address of an  
administrator.  
Preparation  
To transmit the Journal by e-mail,  
it is necessary to make settings  
with User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 21, bit  
4).  
This section describes the CSV format  
of the Journal attached with e-mail.  
Note  
The Journal is automatically transmit-  
ted to an e-mail address of the admin-  
istrator by every 50 communications.  
A CSV format Journal is attached to  
the e-mail.  
❒ To transmit the Journal, it is neces-  
sary to make settings with User Pa-  
rameters. See p.166 “User  
Parameters” (switch 21, bit 4).  
4
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
Important  
❒ This machine does not store sent  
CSV files. It is recommended that  
you double-check the e-mail ad-  
dress of an administrator before  
the Journal is transmitted. If the e-  
mail address of the administrator  
is not correct, your important Jour-  
nal may be lost and sent CSV file is  
not left on the fax machine. See  
“File Transfer”, Network Guide.  
❒ To set the administrator e-mail ad-  
dress, see “File Transfer”, Network  
Guide.  
❒ Depending on security settings,  
the Destination/Sender name may  
not appear.  
Note  
❒ If the administrator address is  
wrong, you may not be able to ac-  
quire Journal.  
❒ If the Journal in e-mail format fails  
to be transmitted, the Journal is  
printed out.  
❒
The name of an attached CSV file is  
“JOURNAL+year, month, hours, min-  
utes”. For example, the file name trans-  
mitted in 14:40:12 on 20th, March, 2005  
is “JOURNAL20050320144012.csv”.  
❒ The subject of Journal by e-mail be-  
gins with “Journal”.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printed Report  
Printed Report  
Note  
Memory Storage Report  
❒ If two or more destinations are  
specified, this report is printed af-  
ter the fax message has been sent to  
all the destinations.  
This report is printed after an original  
is stored in memory. It helps you re-  
view the contents and the destina-  
tions of stored originals.  
❒ If the machine is set up not to print  
this report and the fax message  
could not be successfully transmit-  
ted, a Communication Failure Re-  
port is printed. See p.82  
“Communication Failure Report”.  
Limitation  
❒ If you use Parallel Memory Trans-  
mission, the Memory Storage Re-  
port is not printed.  
4
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
03, bit 0).  
Note  
❒ You can turn this report on and off.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 03, bit 2).  
❒ You can select whether to include  
part of the original image on the re-  
port. See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 04, bit 7).  
❒ Even if the machine is set up not to  
print this report, it is still printed if  
an original could not be stored.  
❒ You can select whether to include  
part of the original image on the re-  
port. See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 04, bit 7).  
❒ To view the report without text  
disruption, select a font of even  
character width in your e-mail ap-  
plication's settings.  
❒ You can display a destination with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
4).  
❒ You can display a destination with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
4).  
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
❒ The Page column gives the total  
number of pages. The Not Sent col-  
umn gives the number of pages  
that could not be sent successfully.  
Communication Result Report  
(Memory Transmission)  
This report is printed when a Memo-  
ry Transmission is completed, so you  
can check the result of the transmis-  
sion. If E-mail TX Results is pro-  
grammed in a Quick Operation key,  
you can select whether a report e-mail  
is sent after transmission. See p.146  
“Quick Operation Key”.  
❒ -- column indicates the Internet  
Fax document was sent to the mail  
server programmed in this ma-  
chine. (However, this does not  
mean the e-mail was delivered.)  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Transmission Features  
❒ -- column indicates the Internet  
Fax document was sent to the mail  
server programmed in this ma-  
chine. (However, this does not  
mean the e-mail was delivered.)  
Communication Failure Report  
This report is printed when a message  
could not be successfully transmitted  
with Memory Transmission.  
If the machine is set up to print an Im-  
mediate TX Result Report, this report  
is not printed. Use it to keep a record  
of failed transmissions so you can  
send them again.  
Immediate TX Result Report  
(Immediate Transmission)  
If you turn this report on, a report will  
be printed after every Immediate  
Transmission so you have a record of  
whether the transmission was suc-  
cessful or not. If the machine is set up  
not to print this report and the fax  
message could not be successfully  
transmitted, the Error Report is print-  
ed instead. If E-mail TX Results is  
programmed in a Quick Operation  
key, you can select whether a report  
e-mail is sent after transmission. See  
p.146 “Quick Operation Key”.  
Note  
❒ You can select whether the Com-  
munication Failure Report and  
Transfer Result Report be auto-  
matically printed using the User  
Parameters. See p.166 “User Pa-  
rameters” (switch 04, bit 1).  
4
❒ This report is only printed if the  
Immediate TX Result Report is  
turned off and a message could not  
be successfully transmitted with  
Memory Transmission.  
Note  
❒ You can select whether to include  
part of the original image on the re-  
port. See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 04, bit 7).  
❒ You can switch this report on or off  
in the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 03, bit  
5).  
❒ You can display a destination with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
4).  
❒ To view the report without text  
Disruption, select a font of even  
character width in your e-mail ap-  
plication's settings.  
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
❒ You can display a destination with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
4).  
❒ The Page column gives the total  
number of pages. The Not Sent col-  
umn gives the number of pages  
that could not be sent successfully.  
❒ If the page was sent successfully,  
the Page column gives the total  
number of pages sent successfully.  
❒ Unprogrammed destination col-  
umn indicates the message could  
not be sent because the transfer's  
fax number is incorrect, or not pro-  
grammed.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Reception Features  
Reception  
❖ Reception resolution  
Immediate Reception  
This machine supports Standard,  
Detail, and Super Fine resolutions  
for reception. If you do not have  
the optional Expansion Memory,  
faxes sent at Super Fine resolution  
will be printed on your machine at  
Detail resolution. This may differ  
from the sender's intended resolu-  
tion. See p.30 “Resolution”, Facsim-  
ile Reference <Basic Features>.  
Each page of a fax message is printed  
as soon as it is received. This method  
is used for standard fax messages.  
Memory Reception  
The machine waits until all pages of  
the message have been received into  
memory before printing it.  
Normally this machine receives mes-  
sages by Immediate Reception. But  
Memory Reception is used when  
“Combine 2 originals”, “Multi-copy  
Reception”, “RX Reverse Printing” or  
“2 Sided Print” is set to “ON”. See  
p.96 “Printing Options”. If the condi-  
tions are that Substitute Reception  
should be used, a fax message is not  
printed. It will be stored in memory.  
See p.83 “Memory Reception”. See  
p.85 “Substitute Reception”.  
This method is used with the follow-  
ing functions:  
Note  
❒ The machine may not be able to re-  
ceive fax messages when free  
memory space is low.  
• Combine 2 originals  
See p.99 “Combine Two Origi-  
nals”.  
❒ If free memory reaches 0% during  
Immediate Reception, any further  
reception becomes impossible and  
the current communication is ter-  
minated.  
• Multi-copy when set to multiple  
copies  
See p.98 “Multi-copy Reception”.  
• Reverse Order Printing  
See p.100 “Reverse Order Print-  
ing”.  
• 2 sided Printing  
See p.97 “Two-Sided Printing”.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
Important  
❒ When about one hour passes after  
power of the machine is turned off,  
all fax messages stored in memory  
will be lost. If any messages have  
been lost for this reason, a Power  
Failure Report is automatically  
printed when the operation switch  
is turned on. Use this report to  
identify lost messages.  
❒ The machine may not be able to re-  
ceive large numbers of messages  
or messages with high data con-  
tent. In such cases, we recommend  
you switch off the above functions  
or install the optional expansion  
memory.  
5
Limitation  
❒ The machine may not be able to re-  
ceive fax messages when free  
memory space is low.  
Note  
❒ If the free memory space reaches  
0% during Memory Reception, the  
machine can no longer receive the  
current fax message and stops  
communicating.  
❒ If you have selected Store for Re-  
ception File Setting, received mes-  
sages will be saved on the hard  
disk and will not be printed. You  
can print those messages by oper-  
ating the machine or a connected  
computer, as necessary. See p.193  
“Storing or Printing Received Doc-  
uments”.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception  
Substitute Reception  
In Substitute Reception, a received fax message is stored in memory instead of  
being printed. Substitute Reception gets used when the machine cannot print  
any fax messages. Fax messages received using Substitute Reception are auto-  
matically printed when the condition which caused the machine to use Substi-  
tute Reception is rectified.  
Depending on why the machine cannot print, Substitute Reception might be  
used for all fax messages received, or for only those messages that match a spec-  
ified condition.  
The Receive File indicator lights to let you know when fax messages have been  
received using Substitute Reception.  
5
AAG016S  
Note  
❒ Reception may not take place if there is not enough free memory.  
❒ If free memory reaches 0% during Substitute Reception, any further reception  
becomes impossible and the current communication is terminated.  
❒ When a fax message is received after Store has been selected for Reception  
File Setting in the Facsimile Features menu, the Receive File indicator lights.  
Receiving messages unconditionally  
If one of the conditions listed below occurs, the machine receives all fax messag-  
es using Substitute Reception.  
Problems  
Causes  
Solutions  
x is lit.  
Paper is jammed.  
Remove the jammed paper.  
See “xClearing Misfeeds”, General  
Settings Guide.  
The machine is printing  
with other function.  
The machine is busy print- The message will be automatically  
ing with other function.  
printed after the current job finishes.  
The output tray is full.  
Remove paper from the output tray.  
The message “Follow-  
ing output tray is  
full. Remove pa-  
per.” appears.  
M is lit.  
The cover is open.  
Close the cover shown in the display.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
Receiving messages according to parameter-specified settings  
If one of the conditions listed below occurs, the machine receives only those mes-  
sages that match the conditions specified in the User Parameters. See p.166 “Us-  
er Parameters” (switch 05, bit 2,1).  
Problems  
Causes  
Solutions  
B is lit.  
All trays out of paper.  
Add paper. See “BLoading Paper” ,  
General Settings Guide.  
D is lit.  
Toner is empty.  
Replace the toner cartridge. See  
“DAdding Toner”, General Settings  
Guide.  
All trays out of action.  
Call your service representative.  
The message “This  
tray is out of or-  
der.” appears.  
You can specify the following conditions with the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 05, bit 2,1).  
5
❖ When Own Name or Own Fax Number is received  
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the sender has pro-  
grammed their Own Name or Own Fax Number. If the power is switched off  
for more than an hour, all the messages stored in memory are deleted. In that  
case, the Power Failure Report or the Journal can be used to identify which  
messages are lost so you can ask the senders to transmit them again.  
Important  
❒ If a sender has not programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number, the  
machine may fail to receive an important fax message. We recommend  
that you ask important senders to program an Own Name or Own Fax  
Number in advance.  
❖ Free  
The machine switches to Substitute Reception regardless of whether or not  
the sender has programmed their Own Name or Own Fax Number.  
❖ Polling ID match  
The machine switches to Substitute Reception only when the programmed  
Polling ID of the other end matches the ID of this machine.  
❖ Disable  
The machine does not receive any messages.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Functions  
Reception Functions  
Preparation  
Transfer Station  
This machine can receive forward-  
ing requests by e-mail. Before you  
can use this function, you must  
make the following preparations.  
Transfer Stations allow you to expand  
the standard functions of your fax  
machine to set up complex networks.  
• Program each Transfer Station  
number in this machine (Trans-  
fer Station) and in the Request-  
ing Party itself. See p.190  
“Transfer Report”.  
The diagram below may make the  
concept clearer.  
• Program the same Polling ID in  
both this machine (Transfer Sta-  
tion) and the Requesting Party.  
See p.192 “Programming a Poll-  
ing ID”.  
5
• The Requesting Party's fax  
number must be programmed  
in the destination list of this ma-  
chine (Transfer Station). The  
registration number must be be-  
tween 00001 and 00100.  
GFTRRQ2E  
The following terminologies are used  
in this section:  
❖ Requesting Party  
The machine where the message  
originates.  
• The End Receiver's fax number,  
e-mail address, or IP-Fax desti-  
nation, must be programmed in  
the destination list or Group  
Dial of this machine (Transfer  
Station).  
❖ Transfer Station (this machine)  
The machine that forwards the in-  
coming message to another desti-  
nation.  
Note  
❒ You cannot receive e-mails unless  
your machine has the capacity to  
store two or more destinations  
specified using the number keys.  
❖ Receiving Station  
The facsimile or computer that re-  
ceived the message from the  
Transfer Station.  
❒ If the Requesting Party specifies a  
Group for the Receiving Stations  
and the total number of Receiving  
Stations exceeds 500, the Transfer  
Station cannot transfer the mes-  
sage and sends a Transfer Result  
Report to the Requesting Party.  
The final destination of the mes-  
sage, that is the machine the Trans-  
fer Station sends to. Receiving  
Stations must be programmed into  
a Quick Dial or Groups in the  
Transfer Station.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
❒ If the Requesting Party specified a  
destination fax number, Internet  
Fax destination and IP-Fax desti-  
nation programmed in Transfer  
Station as End Receiver, this ma-  
chine sends the message to the des-  
tination according to the User  
Parameter setting. See p.166 “User  
Parameters” (switch 32, bit 0).  
Transfer Result Report  
Preparation  
Program the Requesting Party fax  
number into a Quick Dial key in  
the Transfer Station (this machine)  
in advance.  
Program your own fax number.  
See p.190 “Transfer Report”.  
Program the Polling ID. See p.192  
“Programming a Polling ID”.  
-Multistep transfer  
This reports whether transmission to  
the Receiving Stations was successful  
or not.  
The principles of Transfer Stations  
can be used to build up a multi-step  
facsimile network where messages  
are passed through several Transfer  
Stations. By programming the Receiv-  
ing Stations in a Transfer Station  
Group, you can enable this machine  
to transfer messages onto other  
Transfer Stations.  
When the Transfer Station has trans-  
ferred the message to all Receiving  
Stations, it sends the Transfer Result  
Report back to the Requesting Party.  
The machine prints the report if it  
cannot be sent back to the Requesting  
Party.  
5
For more information, contact your  
service representative.  
Note  
This function can only be used if the  
machines are made by the same man-  
ufacturer.  
❒ You can select whether the Com-  
munication Failure Report and  
Transfer Result Report be auto-  
matically printed using the User  
Parameters. See p.166 “User Pa-  
rameters” (switch 04, bit 1).  
-Sending the Transfer Result  
❒ You can set whether a portion of  
the original image is printed on the  
report with the User Parameters.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 04, bit 7).  
Report  
This machine compares the fax num-  
ber of the Requesting Party with the  
Requesting Party's number pro-  
grammed as a Quick Dial or Speed Di-  
al. If the lower five digits of the two  
numbers match, it sends the Transfer  
Result Report to the Requesting Party.  
❒ Unprogrammed destination col-  
umn indicates the message could  
not be sent because the end receiv-  
er's address is incorrect or not pro-  
grammed.  
For example:  
❒ -- column indicates the Internet  
Fax document was sent to the mail  
server programmed in this ma-  
chine.  
• Requesting Party's own dial num-  
ber:  
001813-11112222  
• Transfer Station's Quick Dial:  
03-11112222  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Functions  
Transfer Result Report (transfer request  
by e-mail)  
When this machine receives a transfer  
request by e-mail, the Transfer Result  
Report is sent by e-mail to the Re-  
questing Party after completing all  
transmissions to the specified Trans-  
fer Stations. If the Administrator's e-  
mail address has been programmed,  
the Transfer Result Report e-mail is  
forwarded to that address.  
Note  
❒ Unprogrammed destination col-  
umn indicates the message could  
not be sent because the end receiv-  
er's address is incorrect or not pro-  
grammed.  
5
❒ -- column indicates the Internet  
Fax document was sent to the mail  
server programmed in this ma-  
chine.  
❒ When using multistep transfer, the  
Transfer Result Report e-mail is  
sent to the last Transfer Station that  
sent Transfer Request.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
Forwarding Received Documents  
This machine can forward received documents to other destinations pro-  
grammed in memory based on Own Name, Own Fax Number or sender's e-mail  
address. A fax number, Internet Fax address, IP-Fax address, or folder address  
can be set as a Transfer Box. If a sender's e-mail address is programmed as the  
destination, documents received are forwarded as e-mail.  
5
ADJ009S  
Limitation  
❒ A maximum of 500 parties can be specified in a group.  
Note  
❒ You need to specify the Forwarding destination in advance. See p.162 “For-  
warding”.  
❒ If you want to forward documents to a different destination depending on the  
sender, see p.171 “Special Senders to Treat Differently”.  
❒ You can select whether the machine prints out the messages it forwards with  
User Parameters (switch 11, bit 6). For details, see p.166 “User Parameters”.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Functions  
Routing Received Documents with SUB Code  
When a document is received, its SUB Code is compared to user codes pro-  
grammed in Personal Boxes and, if a match is found, the document is routed to  
the destination whose user code is specified. If the destination specified is an e-  
mail address, the received document is routed to that destination as e-mail.  
In addition to SUB Codes, you can use the forward feature to send all received  
transmissions to a specific e-mail address. See p.162 “Forwarding”.  
5
ADJ010S  
Preparation  
You must set the Personal Box and register a deliver destination beforehand.  
See p.181 “Programming/changing Personal Boxes”.  
Limitation  
❒ This function is not available when you set received documents to be deliv-  
ered to the network delivery server.  
Note  
❒ You can route documents received from any fax machine, regardless of man-  
ufacturer.  
Transferring Received Documents  
Originals sent with a SUB Code that matches the SUB Code programmed as a  
Transfer Box are received then relayed to the programmed receiver.  
When e-mail addresses are programmed in the Transfer Station as receivers, re-  
ceived messages are sent in an e-mail format to the receivers.  
Preparation  
Transfer Boxes and Receiving Stations must be set up in order to transfer re-  
ceived documents. See p.186 “Programming/changing Transfer Boxes”.  
Note  
❒ Transfer Results are not sent back to Requesting Party.  
❒
You can transfer data received from any fax machine, regardless of manufacturer.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
SMTP Reception Using Internet Fax  
You can set this machine to SMTP reception.  
With SMTP reception, e-mail is received as soon as it is sent to the e-mail address  
set by the machine. You can route received e-mail to other Internet Fax machines  
as well.  
ADJ011S  
5
Preparation  
Set this machine beforehand using the MX record of the DNS server to enable  
SMTP reception. Also, set the reception protocol to SMTP under “System Ini-  
tial Setting”. See “Connection and Setup”, Network Guide.  
Note  
❒ Even if SMTP reception is enabled on the DNS server, e-mail sent from the  
SMTP server will not be received and the machine reports an error if SMTP  
reception is not set. Also, the SMTP server sends an error notification to the  
originator.  
❒ If an error occurs while receiving e-mail, reception is aborted, the e-mail is de-  
leted, and Error Report is printed. Also, the SMTP server will send an error  
notification to the originator.  
❒ When the SMTP server attempts to route received documents to this machine  
while the machine is transmitting an e-mail, the machine will respond to the  
SMTP server with a “busy” signal. Then, the SMTP server usually tries re-  
sending the documents until the set timeout.  
Reference  
p.66 “Auto E-mail Reception”, Facsimile Reference <Basic Features>  
p.93 “Routing E-mail Received via SMTP”  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Functions  
Routing E-mail Received via SMTP  
E-mail received via SMTP can be routed to other fax machines. It can also be  
routed to destinations programmed as Quick Dial entries or Groups.  
5
ADJ012S  
Preparation  
Before routing e-mail received via SMTP, you first must set “SMTP RX File  
Delivery Settings” to “On”. See p.148 “E-mail Settings” .  
Limitation  
❒ Depending on security settings, this function may not be available.  
Note  
❒ If an e-mail transfer request is received when the “SMTP RX File Delivery Set-  
tings” to “Off”, this machine responds with an error message to the SMTP  
server.  
❒ You can make settings that limit transfer to specified originators. See p.148  
“E-mail Settings”.  
❒ Using this function, you can also send documents from your e-mail software  
to e-mail addresses and G3 fax machines' destinations through this machine  
simultaneously. For details about specifying the destinations of fax machines,  
see the following.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
-Specifying E-mail Transfer  
The originator can request transfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by spec-  
ifying the e-mail address as follows:  
❖ Fax Number  
fax=destination fax number@host name of this machine. domain name  
Example: to transfer to fax number 212-123-4567, specify:  
fax=2121234567@abc.company.com  
❖ Quick Dial Destination  
fax=#registration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.do-  
main name  
Example: to transfer to the destination number 00001:  
fax=#00001@abc.company.com  
❖ Group Destination  
fax=#**registration number of 5 digits or less@host name of this machine.do-  
main name  
5
Example: to transfer to the destination programmed under Group number 04:  
fax=#**04@abc.company.com  
Limitation  
❒ A maximum of 500 parties can be specified in a group.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Functions  
JBIG Reception  
If you use JBIG (Joint Bi-level Image  
Experts Group) compression, you can  
send photographic originals faster  
than with other methods of compres-  
sion. It allows you to receive messag-  
es sent in the JBIG format through  
JBIG Transmission.  
Limitation  
❒ You can only use this function  
with telephone line.  
❒ If ECM is turned off, JBIG Recep-  
tion is unavailable. See p.165  
“ECM (Error Correction Mode)”.  
5
Auto Fax Reception Power-up  
This machine can be set to shut down  
automatically if no one has used it for  
a while. In these situations, even  
though the operation switch is off, the  
machine can still receive incoming  
messages as long as the main power  
switch is on.  
Important  
❒ Reception is not possible if both  
the operation switch and main  
power switch are turned off.  
Note  
❒ You can set whether messages are  
printed as soon as they are re-  
ceived (Immediate Reception)  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
14, bit 0).  
❒ You can also have fax messages re-  
ceived by Memory Reception  
(Substitute Reception) printed af-  
ter the machine is turned on.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
Printing Options  
Print Completion Beep  
Center Mark  
When this function is turned on, the  
machine beeps to let you know when  
a received message has been printed.  
When this function is enabled, marks  
are printed halfway down the left  
side or at the top center of each page  
received. This makes it easy for you to  
position a hole puncher correctly  
when you file received messages.  
Note  
❒ You can alter the volume of the  
beep or turn it off completely (set  
the volume to the minimum level).  
See p.83 “Adjusting the Volume”,  
Facsimile Reference <Basic Features>.  
Checkered Mark  
5
When this function is turned on, a  
Checkered Mark is printed on the  
first page of fax messages to help you  
separate them.  
Note  
❒ The Center Mark may deviate a lit-  
tle from the exact center of the  
edge.  
❒ You can turn enabled/disable this  
function using Reception Settings.  
See p.147 “Reception Settings”.  
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
using Reception Setting. See p.147  
“Reception Settings”.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Options  
Limitation  
Reception Time  
❒ To use this function, all pages of  
the received document must be of  
the same size—inform the sending  
party of this beforehand if neces-  
sary. You must also have paper set  
in your machine of the same size as  
that sent by the sending party. In  
Two–Sided Printing, this machine  
will correctly receive in A3L, B4  
JIS (Japanese Industrial Stan-  
dard)L, A4KL, B5 JISKL,  
A5KL(11"×17"L, 81/2"×14"L,  
81/2"×11"KL, 81/2"×51/2"L). The  
following table shows the results  
that can be achieved when receiv-  
ing with this machine.  
You can have the date and time print-  
ed at the bottom of the message when  
it is received. You can turn this func-  
tion on or off using Reception Set-  
tings. See p.147 “Reception Settings”.  
Note  
❒ When a received message is print-  
ed on two or more sheets, the date  
and time is printed on the last  
page.  
❒ The date and time when the mes-  
sage was printed can also be re-  
corded on the message. If you need  
this function, contact your service  
representative.  
5
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
using Reception Settings. See p.147  
“Reception Settings”.  
Two-Sided Printing  
You can have a received message  
printed on both sides of a sheet. You  
can turn this function on or off using  
Reception Settings. See p.147 “Recep-  
tion Settings”.  
❒ This function works only when all  
pages are of the same width and  
received into memory.  
❒ This function cannot be used with  
Combine Two Originals.  
❒ An external tray cannot be used as  
a destination for two-sided printed  
sheets.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
Note  
Multi-copy Reception  
❒ The machine will use Memory Re-  
ception for Two-Sided Printing.  
If you switch this function on, multi-  
ple copies of each incoming fax mes-  
sage will be printed. You can also  
select to have multiple copies made of  
messages from particular senders.  
See p.171 “Special Senders to Treat  
Differently”. See p.147 “Reception  
Settings”.  
❒ Printouts may vary depending on  
how the sender sets the originals.  
❒ You can select to have messages  
only from selected senders printed  
in this way. See p.171 “Special  
Senders to Treat Differently”.  
❒ Stored documents of the same size  
are printed on the same paper.  
Some stored documents may be  
unavailable for this printing op-  
tion.  
180-Degree Rotation Printing  
5
When printing on both sides of the  
paper, this machine rotates images as  
shown in the diagram.  
Note  
❒ The maximum number of copies  
that can be made for each message  
is 10.  
❒ When you are using the Multi-  
Copy function with specified send-  
ers, the maximum number of cop-  
ies is 10.  
CP2B02E0  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
using Reception Settings. See p.147  
“Reception Settings”.  
❒ The machine will use Memory Re-  
ception for Multi-copy Reception.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Options  
• Two A4K messages are printed  
side by side on a sheet of A3L.  
Image Rotation  
• Two 81/2"×51/2"K messages are  
printed side by side on a sheet of  
81/2"×11"L.  
• Two 81/2"×11"K messages are  
printed side by side on a sheet of  
11"×17"L.  
If you have set paper in the standard  
tray K, incoming fax messages will  
be rotated automatically to fit onto  
the paper.  
Limitation  
❒ This function does not work with  
messages larger than A5K, B5  
JISK, A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or 81/2"  
× 51/2"K. When A5K, B5 JISK,  
A4K, 81/2" × 11"K or 81/2" ×  
51/2"K size paper is loaded in the  
machine, each page of the received  
message is printed on a single  
sheet.  
5
Note  
❒ You can choose to have received  
messages printed from a specified  
tray. See p.147 “Reception Set-  
tings”.  
❒ If paper matching the size and ori-  
entation of a received document is  
unavailable, Combine Two Origi-  
nals is not possible.  
❒ When Combine Two Originals and  
2 Sided Print are selected at the  
same time, 2 Sided Print takes pri-  
ority and Combine Two Originals  
is canceled.  
Combine Two Originals  
When two messages of the same size  
and orientation are received consecu-  
tively, they are printed on a single  
sheet when you turn this function on.  
This can help you economize on pa-  
per.  
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
10, bit 1).  
❒ This function uses Memory Recep-  
tion.  
• Two A5K messages are printed  
side by side on a sheet of A4L.  
• Two B5 JISK messages are printed  
side by side on a sheet of B4 JISL.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
• Guideline for split: 5-155mm  
(5mm steps)/0.2"-6.1" (0.2"  
steps)  
Page Separation and Length  
Reduction  
When the size of a received message  
is longer than the paper loaded in the  
machine, each page of the message  
can be split and printed on several  
sheets, or reduced and printed on a  
single sheet. For example, this func-  
tion splits the message if the message  
length is 20mm (0.79") or longer than  
the paper used. The message is re-  
duced if it is less than 20mm (0.79").  
When a message is split, an asterisk  
(*) is inserted at the split position and  
about 10mm (0.39") of the split area is  
duplicated on the top of the second  
sheet.  
Reverse Order Printing  
Normally, received pages are printed  
and stacked on the tray in the order  
they are received. If you turn this  
function on, the machine will start  
printing the message from the last  
page received.  
5
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
using Reception Settings. See p.147  
“Reception Settings”.  
❒ When this function is on, the first  
page will be printed last.  
Note  
❒ This function uses Memory Recep-  
❒ Your service representative can  
customize this function with the  
following settings:  
tion.  
• Reduction  
• Print split mark  
• Overprinting  
• Overprinting length  
• Guideline for split  
❒ You can adjust the overprinting  
and reduction lengths within the  
following ranges:  
•
Overprinting length: 4mm (0.16"),  
10mm (0.39"), 15mm (0.59")  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Options  
Page Reduction  
TSI Print (Transmitting  
Subscriber Identification Print)  
If you receive a message that is longer  
than the paper in the tray, the ma-  
chine usually prints it on two pages. If  
you turn this function on, the ma-  
chine reduces the width and length of  
the received image so that it will fit on  
one page. If A4L paper is loaded and  
a message of B4 JISL size is received,  
the machine will reduce the message  
to a single A4L sheet.  
Usually the sender's Fax Header is  
printed on received messages. If the  
sender has not programmed their Fax  
Header , you will not be able to iden-  
tify them. However, if you turn this  
function on, the sender's Own Name  
or Own Fax Number is printed in-  
stead so you can find out where the  
message came from. When you re-  
ceive an Internet Fax document, the e-  
mail address of the sender is printed.  
Reference  
p.75 “Initial Settings and Adjust-  
ments”, Facsimile Reference <Basic  
Features>  
5
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
in the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 02, bit  
3).  
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
10, bit 3).  
When There Is No Paper of the  
Correct Size  
❒ When this function is used, the  
printing quality may not be as  
good as usual.  
If there is no paper in your machine  
that matches the size of a received  
message, the machine will choose a  
paper size based on the paper avail-  
able. For example, if your machine  
has 81/2"×11"K and A3L loaded and  
you receive a A4L size message,  
check the A4L column of the follow-  
ing table. The paper size at the top has  
highest priority. In this case, since  
81/2"×11"K is given a higher priority  
than A3L, the message is printed on  
81/2"×11"K.  
Reference  
p.100 “Page Separation and  
Length Reduction”  
If only B5 JISL is loaded and you re-  
ceive an A3L message, the received  
message is stored in memory and not  
printed.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
❒ The paper size used to print a re-  
ceived message may be different  
from the size of the sent original.  
❖ Priority Table  
❒ If you specify a receiving tray with  
the setting priority under System  
Settings, the messages may be re-  
ceived in a different order by set-  
ting the priority table. The priority  
tray may be used only when the  
document received is the same size  
as the priority tray.  
Reference  
p.99 “Image Rotation”  
p.100 “Page Separation and  
Length Reduction”  
p.101 “Page Reduction”  
5
“Tray Paper Settings”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
Page reduction  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Setting priority trays  
Reduction in Sub-  
scan Direction  
With the same size of paper loaded  
into multiple trays, you can make the  
machine use one tray for one function  
and another tray for another function.  
For example, you may load white A4  
paper into tray 1 to use when making  
copies, and yellow A4 paper into tray  
2 to use when printing received faxes.  
You can then easily identify for which  
purpose paper has been output. You  
can perform this setting using System  
Settings. See “Tray Paper Settings”,  
General Settings Guide.  
Page Separation  
Threshold  
20mm (0.79")  
Width or Length Pri- Width  
ority  
• KK and LL indicate that the  
message is split over two pages of  
paper with the orientation and size  
shown.  
Note  
❒ Paper placed in the bypass tray is  
not usually selected for printing a  
received message. However, you  
can use this tray if you select the  
bypass tray as the main paper tray  
using Reception with Specified  
Senders. See p.171 “Special Send-  
ers to Treat Differently”.  
Note  
❒ When a different size of document  
from the priority tray is received,  
the tray containing the same size of  
paper as the received document is  
used.  
❒ Widths that this machine can re-  
ceive are A4, B4 JIS, and A3. Any  
messages narrower than A4 are  
sent as A4 width with the length  
unchanged.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Options  
Just size printing  
Having Incoming Messages Printed on  
Paper from the Bypass Tray  
If you enable this function, received  
documents are printed on the sheet  
that has highest priority. See p.102  
“Priority Table”. This function is en-  
abled with User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch 05,  
bit 5).  
You can print messages sent from  
Specified Senders on paper from the  
bypass tray.  
Set as follows:  
• Program a special sender and se-  
lect the Bypass Tray for the paper  
tray type. See p.178 “Programming  
Bypass Tray Paper Size” under  
“Program Special Sender”.  
If the paper tray is not stocked with  
paper of a suitable size to print a re-  
ceived document, a message appears  
on the display prompting you to load  
paper of the required size. When you  
have loaded new paper, press [Exit] to  
print the document.  
• Turn on the Authorized RX func-  
tion under the Program Special  
Sender function. See p.178 “Pro-  
gramming Authorized RX and  
Special RX Function”.  
5
Limitation  
❒ When using this function, printed  
sheets cannot be delivered to the  
finisher output tray. Even if you  
specify the finisher output tray,  
sheets are delivered to the Internal  
Tray 1. See “Tray Paper Set-  
tings:Fax”, General Settings Guide.  
Note  
❒ After pressing [Exit], procedure  
varies depending on machine sta-  
tus when the message occurred.  
Note  
❒ You can load a maximum of 100  
sheets of standard paper in the by-  
pass tray.  
•
If any received documents or re-  
ports were being printed automat-  
ically, the printer automatically  
continues printing from where it  
left off.  
❒ You can use a size of paper not  
stocked in the paper tray(s) in the  
bypass tray.  
❒
The machine can detect A5L, A4L,  
• If any documents or reports  
were being printed manually,  
the printer does not resume  
printing. Perform the operation  
from the beginning again.  
A3L, 51/2"×81/2"L, 81/2"×11"L,  
11"×13"L, 8"×13"L paper sizes.  
When you load any other size,  
specify the paper size. However, if  
the specified paper size and size of  
paper set in the bypass tray do not  
match, paper jams may occur, or  
the image may be shortened. See  
p.178 “Programming Bypass Tray  
Paper Size”.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
❒ Messages printed on paper smaller  
than A4 may be shortened, or split  
across sheets.  
❒ Paper longer than 600mm may be  
creased, not sent, or jam.  
❒ Print area depends on optional ex-  
pansion memory, resolution, and  
vertical length of originals.  
❒ If you use this function, Image Ro-  
tation and 180-Degree Rotating  
Printing are not possible.  
5
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where Incoming Message are Delivered - Output Tray  
Where Incoming Message are Delivered -  
Output Tray  
Specifying Tray for Lines  
Tray Shift  
The optional extra G3 interface unit is re-  
quired.  
The optional finisher is required.  
When the optional finisher unit is se-  
lected for fax output, you can use the  
Tray Shift function whenever a fax or  
report is printed.  
You can specify the document feed-  
ing tray for each port (telephone, In-  
ternet Fax, IP-Fax). For example, you  
can specify documents received  
through the G3 -1 port to be fed to the  
“Internal Tray 1” and documents re-  
ceived through the G3 -2 port to be  
fed to the “Internal Tray 2”, facilitat-  
ing separation of files. You can also  
set the machine to output Internet  
Faxes and ordinary faxes onto differ-  
ent trays.  
This is useful for separating faxes  
stacked in the finisher output tray.  
For example, if the previous incoming  
fax was output to the left, the next in-  
coming fax will be output to the right  
and vice-versa.  
5
Note  
❒ You can turn this function on or off  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
19, bit 0).  
Note  
❒ To use this function, specify the  
port and destination using [Specify  
Tray for Lines]. See p.147 “Reception  
Settings”.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reception Features  
5
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Fax via Computer  
Sending Fax Documents from Computers  
Using computers connected to the machine through parallel ports, IEEE 1394 (IP  
Over 1394) ports, LANs, or wireless LANs you can fax documents, created using  
Windows applications, to other fax machines over a telephone line.  
• To send a fax, simply select [Print] from the Windows application, then select  
LAN-Fax as the printer, and then specify a destination.  
• In addition to sending faxes, LAN-Fax Driver allows this machine to be used  
for printing out documents prepared on a computer for proof checking.  
• To use LAN-Fax Driver, connect this machine to a LAN and make the neces-  
sary network settings, and then install LAN-Fax Driver and related utility on  
your computer.  
ADJ013S  
Important  
❒ Errors occurring when the machine is used as a LAN-Fax will not be dis-  
played on the computer. Check the help menus using a Web Image Monitor.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
Auto run program  
Before Use  
With Windows 95/98/Me, Windows  
2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 and  
Windows NT 4.0, the installers for  
various drivers and utilities launch  
automatically as Auto Run programs  
when you insert the CD-ROM.  
To use these features, a LAN-Fax  
Driver must be installed on your com-  
puter. Use the LAN-Fax Driver in-  
cluded on the printer CD-ROM. You  
must also make the required comput-  
er to fax network settings on the ma-  
chine, according to the type of  
connection.  
If your operating system is Windows  
2000/XP, Windows Server 2003 or  
Windows NT 4.0, installing a printer  
driver using Auto Run requires Ad-  
ministrator permissions. When you  
install LAN-Fax Driver using Auto  
Run, log on using an account that has  
Administrator permissions.  
Reference  
When a personal computer and the  
machine are connected in parallel:  
See “System Settings (Parallel Con-  
nection)”, Printer Reference.  
When using Ethernet, IEEE 1394  
(IP over 1394), or IEEE 802.11b  
(wireless LAN):  
Note  
❒ If the plug and play function starts,  
click [Cancel] in the [New Hardware  
Found], [Device Driver Wizard], or  
[Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog  
box, and then insert the CD-ROM.  
The [New Hardware Found] or [Found  
New Hardware Wizard] dialog box ap-  
pears depending on the system  
version of Windows 95/98/Me,  
Windows 2000/XP, or Windows  
Server 2003.  
See “Connection and Setup”, Net-  
work Guide.  
6
Installing the Software  
You need to install LAN-Fax Driver  
on your computer before using the  
LAN-Fax functions. LAN-Fax Driver  
is on the CD-ROM included with the  
printer.  
❒ Auto Run might not work auto-  
matically with certain OS settings.  
If this is the case, double-click “Set-  
up.exe”, located on the CD-ROM  
root directory.  
Address Book and LAN-Fax Cover  
Sheet Editor are installed with LAN-  
Fax Driver. Address Book helps you  
edit LAN-Fax transmission destina-  
tions. LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor  
helps you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.  
❒ If you want to cancel Auto Run,  
hold down the {SHIFT} key (when  
your system is Windows 2000/Win-  
dows XP or Windows Server 2003,  
hold down the left the {SHIFT} key)  
while inserting the CD-ROM. Keep  
the {SHIFT} key hold down until  
the computer stops reading the  
CD-ROM.  
Note  
❒
The following explanation assumes  
that you are familiar with general  
Windows procedures and practic-  
es. If you are not, see the documen-  
tation that comes with Windows  
for details.  
❒ Clicking [Cancel] during installa-  
tion aborts the installation. If you  
cancel the installation, restart your  
computer and install the rest of the  
software or printer driver.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Fax Documents from Computers  
LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and  
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor can be  
installed by Auto Run.  
Note  
❒ If you select [I don't accept the  
agreement], you cannot complete  
the installation.  
Installing individual applications  
F Click the [LAN-Fax Driver] check  
box, and then click [Next].  
Preparation  
Before installing the above appli-  
cations, install SmartDeviceMoni-  
tor for Client. See “Software and  
Utilities Included on the CD-  
ROM”, Printer Reference.  
G
Confirm that the [Printer Name:<LAN-  
Fax M6>] check box has been se-  
lected, and then click [Continue].  
Note  
❒ Select the desired port.  
Use the following procedure to install  
LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book, and  
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor at one  
time.  
H Click [Finish].  
The installation completion dialog  
box appears.  
I Click [Finish].  
A Quit all applications currently  
running.  
J Click [Exit].  
6
B
Insert the CD-ROM included with  
this machine into the CD-ROM  
drive of your computer.  
Applications Stored on the  
CD-ROM  
The installer launches automatical-  
ly, and the language selection win-  
dow appears.  
This section provides information  
about LAN-Fax Driver, Address Book,  
and LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.  
Note  
❒ Depending on your operating  
system settings, the installer  
may not launch automatically.  
If it does not, double-click “SET-  
UP.EXE” in the CD-ROM root  
directory to launch the installer.  
LAN-Fax Driver  
This driver allows you to use LAN-  
Fax functions.  
❖ Location of the File  
The following folders are on the  
CD-ROM:  
C Select the interface language of  
the software, and then click [OK].  
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows  
95/98/Me  
D Click [LAN-Fax Driver].  
The software license agreement  
window appears.  
DRIVERSLAN-  
FAXWIN9X_Me  
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows  
NT 4.0  
E Read all of the terms and, if you  
agree, select [I accept the agreement],  
and then click [Next].  
\DRIVERS\LAN-FAX\NT4  
• LAN-Fax Driver for Windows  
2000/XP  
DRIVERSLAN-FAXWIN2K_XP  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
Fax via Computer  
❖ Operating Environment  
Setting LAN-Fax Driver  
Properties  
• Computer  
PC/AT Compatible  
• Operating Systems  
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me  
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0  
Note  
❒ If your operating system is Win-  
dows NT 4.0, Windows 2000/XP,  
or Windows Server 2003, log on  
using an account that has Admin-  
istrator rights.  
• Display  
VGA 640×480 dots or more  
Limitation  
Setting Print Properties  
❒ All operations cannot be guaran-  
teed depending on the system en-  
vironment.  
This section describes how to make set-  
tings such as paper size or resolution.  
❒ When you use Windows NT,  
LAN-Fax Driver will not work in  
an RISC base processor (MIPS R  
series, Alpha AXP, PowerPC) en-  
vironment.  
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Set-  
tings], and then click [Printers].  
Note  
❒ With Windows XP Professional  
or Windows Server 2003, select  
[Printers and Faxes] on the [Start]  
menu.  
6
Note  
❒ Before beginning installation, exit  
all other applications.  
❒ With Windows XP Home Edi-  
tion, select [Control Panel] on the  
[Start] menu. Next select [Print-  
ers and Other Hardware], and then  
[Printers and Faxes].  
Address Book  
Address Book helps you edit LAN-  
Fax transmission destinations.  
B Select to highlight [LAN-Fax M6],  
then click [Properties] on the [File]  
menu.  
❖ Operating Systems  
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me  
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0  
Note  
❒ With Windows NT, click [Docu-  
mentDefault] on the [File] menu.  
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor  
C Set the print properties.  
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor helps  
you edit LAN-Fax cover sheets.  
When using Windows 95/98/Me  
❖ Operating Systems  
A Click the [Paper] tab.  
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me  
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0  
B
Set the properties as shown below.  
• Paper size  
• Orientation  
• Tray  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                    
                        
Sending Fax Documents from Computers  
• Resolution  
When using a network  
• Gray scale  
A If the settings do not match the  
installed optional units, click  
[Load from Device].  
• Printing images of True Type  
fonts  
When using Windows 2000/XP,  
Windows Server 2003, or  
Windows NT 4.0  
When not using a network  
A Select the check box besides  
the installed optional units.  
A Click the [Paper Setting] button.  
B
Set the properties as shown below.  
Paper size  
C Click [OK].  
•
Option configuration settings are  
complete.  
• Orientation  
• Tray  
D Click [OK].  
• Resolution  
Making Settings for Option  
Configuration  
-[Accessories] tab  
The [Accessories] tab contains the fol-  
lowing items besides option configu-  
ration items.  
6
Make settings for optional units in-  
stalled in this machine.  
❖ Prohibit manual destination entry  
Check this option to inhibit direct  
destination specification.  
Note  
❒ If the options on this machine are  
not configured as instructed, LAN-  
Fax functions may fail.  
❖ Enable E-mail  
Check this when using Internet  
Fax with the LAN-Fax function.  
❒ When this machine is connected to  
a network, option configuration is  
automatically performed. For de-  
tails, see LAN-Fax Driver's Help.  
❖ IP-Fax  
Check this option when using IP-  
Fax, check this option.  
After checking this option, select a  
protocol by clicking an appropri-  
ate radio button.  
A Perform Steps and in “Setting  
A
B
Print Properties”.  
B Make settings for the option con-  
figuration.  
Reference  
Protocols are configured under IP-  
Fax Setting. See p.150 “IP-Fax Set-  
tings”.  
When using Windows 95/98/Me  
A Click the [Accessories] tab.  
When using Windows 2000/XP,  
Windows Server 2003, or  
Windows NT 4.0  
A Click the [Accessories] tab.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
❒ Documents transmitted from  
LAN-Fax can be stored in this  
machine. The number of these  
documents that can be stored is  
as follows:  
Basic Transmission  
This section describes how to send fax  
documents created using Windows  
applications.  
• Without cover sheet  
Standard: 400  
To send a fax, simply select [Print]  
from the Windows application, then  
select [LAN-Fax] as the printer, and  
then specify a destination in the [LAN-  
Fax] dialog box.  
• With cover sheet  
Standard: 200  
Specifying a destination using a  
destination list  
Open the application document you  
want to send or create a new docu-  
ment, and then perform the following  
procedure.  
A Click the [Address Book:] or [Fax  
Number] tab.  
For details, see Help.  
The [Address Book:] or [Fax Num-  
ber] dialog box appears.  
Limitation  
B Check the [Device Address] (or  
[Use programmed machine's ad-  
dress]) checkbox.  
❒ When using SmartDeviceMonitor  
for Client, you cannot send docu-  
ments to this machine using more  
than one LAN-Fax at the same  
time.  
6
C The machine's address is dis-  
played in the [Device Address]  
field on the [Address Book:] tab.  
On the [Fax number:] tab, enter  
the registration number of the  
destination key.  
A On the [File] menu, click [Print].  
B
Select [LAN-Fax M6] in[Printer Name]  
.
C Click [OK].  
D Click [Set as Destination].  
The LAN-Fax dialog box appears.  
The entered destination is add-  
ed and appears in the [List of  
Destinations] box.  
Note  
❒ The setting method may differ  
depending on the application  
you are using. In all cases, select  
[LAN-Fax M6] for the printer.  
Note  
❒ If you add a destination by  
mistake, click the wrong des-  
tination and then click [Delete  
from List].  
D Specify the destination.  
Use one of the following proce-  
dures to specify a destination. For  
details, see LAN-Fax Driver's  
Help.  
E To specify more destinations,  
repeat Steps C and D.  
Note  
❒
When user authentication is used  
with this machine, click [User  
Settings].  
❒ You can specify up to 500 desti-  
nations.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Fax Documents from Computers  
❒ If you selected [Group] from  
the [Format:] dropdown  
menu, you cannot select the  
Specifying a destination using  
Address Book  
fax type. Proceed to Step  
.
E
In order to use this method, you  
need to register destinations in the  
address list using Address Book.  
See p.110 “Address Book”.  
E Click the destination in the  
destination list to highlight it,  
and then click [Set as Destina-  
tion].  
A Click the [Address Book:] tab.  
The entered destination is add-  
ed and appears in the [List of  
Destinations] box.  
The contents of the [Address  
Book:] tab are displayed.  
B Select a CSV file containing  
the desired destination list,  
from the drop-down menu.  
Note  
❒ If you add a destination by  
mistake, click the wrong des-  
tination and then click [Delete  
from List].  
Note  
❒ Up to three most recently  
used files appear in the drop-  
down menu. To use a desti-  
nation list that did not  
appear, click [Browse], and  
then select the file.  
F To specify more destinations,  
repeat Steps B through E.  
6
Specifying a destination by  
directly entering a fax number,  
Internet Fax destination, or IP-  
Fax destination  
C Select [Contact] or [Group] in the  
[Name:] dropdown menu as the  
display format.  
A
Click the [Specify Destination] tab.  
Note  
❒
Destination list contents change  
as follows, depending on the  
option selected:  
The contents of the [Specify Des-  
tination] tab are displayed.  
B Select the type of fax from the  
• Contact: Company name,  
department name, indi-  
vidual name, fax number  
[Type:] dropdown menu.  
Note  
❒ Select the fax type as follows:  
• Group: Group name  
•
Send by standard fax: [Fax]  
❒ If you selected [Group] from  
• Send by Internet Fax: [E-  
the [Name:] dropdown menu,  
mail]  
proceed to Step  
.
E
• Send by IP-Fax: [IP-Fax]  
D Select the type of fax from the  
[Type:] dropdown menu.  
❒ After you select the fax type,  
a screen corresponding to the  
selected type appear.  
Note  
❒ Select the fax type as follows:  
C Specify the destination.  
•
Send by standard fax: [Fax]  
• Send by Internet Fax: [E-  
mail]  
• Send by IP-Fax: [IP-Fax]  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
Note  
Note  
❒ Specify the destination de-  
❒ If you have added a wrong  
destination by mistake, click  
the destination by clicking it,  
an then click [Delete from List].  
pending on the selected fax  
type as follows:  
• When [Fax] is selected: en-  
ter the fax number.  
F To specify more destinations,  
repeat Steps B through E.  
• When [E-mail] is selected:  
enter the e-mail address.  
E Specify necessary options.  
• When [IP-Fax] is selected:  
enter the IP-Fax destina-  
tion.  
Reference  
p.114 “Specifying options”.  
❒ You can enter up to 128 char-  
p.116 “Confirming Transmis-  
sion Results by E-mail”.  
acters for the destination.  
❒ To enter a pause in the fax  
number, click [Pause]. If you  
selected [E-mail] or [IP-Fax] in  
Step B, [Pause] is not avail-  
able.  
F Click [Send].  
Note  
❒ When you click [Send & Print],  
the fax is sent to the destination  
and your machine prints a copy  
of the document you send.  
Reference  
6
p.35 “Entering a Fax Num-  
ber”, Facsimile Reference <Ba-  
sic Features>  
Specifying options  
p.36 “Entering an E-mail Ad-  
dress”, Facsimile Reference  
<Basic Features>  
You can specify the options listed be-  
low.  
For details, see LAN-Fax Driver's  
Help.  
p.37 “Entering an IP-Fax  
Destination”, Facsimile Refer-  
ence <Basic Features>  
• Sending at a Specific Time  
• Print Sender Stamp  
• Attach Cover Sheet  
• Two-Sided Printing  
• Display Preview  
D Select a line or protocol from  
the [Line:] or [Protocol:] drop-  
down menu.  
Note  
❒ The [Line:] dropdown menu  
is displayed when you select-  
ed [Fax] in Step B while the  
[Protocol:] dropdown menu is  
displayed when you selected  
[IP-Fax] in Step B If you se-  
lected [E-mail] in Step B, pro-  
ceed to Step E.  
• Save as File  
• Document Server  
A Click [Send Options].  
The [Send Options] window ap-  
pears.  
E Click [Set as Destination].  
The entered destination is add-  
ed and displayed in the [List of  
Destinations] box.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Fax Documents from Computers  
C
Click [Next] or [Previous] to check  
the image.  
B Specify the options you want to  
use.  
Note  
❒ To close the [Preview] win-  
To send a fax document at a  
specific time  
dow, click [Cancel].  
❒ To print the preview image,  
A Select the [Sending at specific  
time] check box, and then spec-  
ify a transmission time.  
click [Print].  
Saving as Files  
B Click [Send].  
You can save the fax document in  
TIFF format.  
To print a Sender Stamp  
A Select the [Save as file] check  
A
Select the [Print Fax Header] check  
box.  
box.  
B Click [Save to...].  
B Click [Send].  
C
Select a folder on the folder tree.  
D Select a method of file naming.  
To attach a cover sheet  
Note  
A Select the [Attach a Cover Sheet]  
check box to attach a cover  
sheet to the document you are  
sending.  
6
❒ To enter a file name manual-  
ly, select the [Specify file name  
when saving] check box. To  
have the program name the  
file, select the [Automatically  
create a new file] check box.  
Note  
❒ Click [Edit Cover Sheet] to edit  
the cover sheet. See p.121  
“Editing Fax Cover Sheets”.  
E Click [OK].  
F Click [Save] or [Send & Save].  
❒ Click [Send].  
Note  
❒ If you select [Automatically cre-  
ate a new file], the image file is  
assigned a name and saved  
under the specified folder.  
To specify two-sided printing  
A Select the [2 sided printing] check  
box.  
❒ The file name will be RicH-  
HMMSS.tif (HH: hours, MM:  
minutes, SS: seconds).  
B Click [Print].  
To display preview  
G Enter a file name.  
Selecting the [Preview] check box  
allows you to check how the fax  
document will be output at the  
destination.  
Note  
❒ You can also change the fold-  
er in this step.  
H Click [Save].  
A Select the [Preview] check box.  
B Click [Print] or [Send & Print].  
The [Preview] window appears.  
The image file is saved in the  
specified folder.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
Note  
To store the fax document on the  
Document Server  
❒ When data is transmitted from the  
LAN-Fax Driver via the “SmartDe-  
viceMonitor for Client” port, the  
“Data transfer completed” mes-  
sage appears on the computer's  
display, so you can easily ascertain  
the communication progress.  
However, if the volume of commu-  
nication data from the LAN-Fax to  
this machine increases, the mes-  
sage may appear during the opera-  
tion, due to the differences in  
memory capacity between this ma-  
chine and “SmartDeviceMonitor  
for Client”. For more accurate fax  
transmission results, use “Com-  
munication Result Report”. See  
p.81 “Communication Result Re-  
port (Memory Transmission)”.  
A
Select the [Send to Document Serv-  
er] check box, and then enter a  
user name, file name, and pass-  
word.  
Note  
❒ If [Hard Disk Unit] is not select-  
ed in [Accessories] under  
[LAN-Fax Driver properties],  
you cannot select for [Docu-  
ment Server].  
B Click [Send].  
-Checking transmission using  
LAN-Fax Driver  
From “SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-  
min”, “SmartDeviceMonitor for Cli-  
ent”, or Web Image Monitor, you can  
check information on files sent using  
LAN-Fax Driver.  
6
Confirming Transmission Results by E-  
mail  
After you are communicating the  
LAN-Fax mode, this function trans-  
mits the communication results with  
the computer by e-mail.  
Also, you can save the content of the  
communication management report  
in a personal computer as a CSV file  
using [Fax Communication Management  
Report Acquisition] in “SmartDevice-  
Monitor for Admin”.  
When you have done [Send] or [Send  
Print] using the LAN-Fax, and when  
the communiction has been success-  
ful from the computer to this ma-  
chine, it transmits an e-mail of the  
transmission result. See p.81 “Com-  
munication Result Report (Memory  
Transmission)”.  
Reference  
See the relevant Help for details.  
In addition, in case of communication  
error from the computer to this ma-  
chine, or in case of printing, the LAN-  
Fax Result E-mail Report is transmit-  
ted.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Fax Documents from Computers  
Note  
❒ If there be any insufficient configu-  
ration in the e-mail menu on this  
machine, or if “Auto Specify Send-  
er Name” is set to “Off”, the LAN-  
Fax result notification e-mail will  
not be transmitted, and the LAN-  
Fax Result Report is printed out.  
See “Setting File Transfer”, Net-  
work Guide for the e-mail settings,  
and see p.118 “LAN-Fax Result Re-  
port” for the LAN-Fax Result Re-  
port.  
A Click the [E-mail Settings] tab.  
B Select the [Notify] check box under  
[E-mail TX results].  
C Enter the destination.  
6
When entering the e-mail  
address directly  
A Click the [Specify destinations]  
radio button.  
B Enter the e-mail address in the  
[Specify destinations] field.  
When entering the machine's  
programmed address  
A Click the [Device Address] radio  
button.  
B
Enter the machine's programmed  
address in the [Device Address]  
field.  
Note  
❒
This field is unavailable when  
the [Specify destinations] is se-  
lected, and you cannot enter  
in the text box.  
D Click [Send].  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
LAN-Fax Result Report  
In case of being set at the LAN-Fax result e-mail report, if there be any insuffi-  
cient configuration in the e-mail menu on this machine, or if “Auto Specify Send-  
er Name” is set to “Off”, the LAN-Fax result notification e-mail will not be  
transmitted, and the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed out. If the “LAN-Fax Re-  
sult E-mail Report” of “Sender Settings” in “Transmission Mode” has not been  
set at “Yes”, the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed out.  
Note  
❒ Whether or not the LAN-Fax Result Report is printed out, can be configured  
at “User Parameters”. See p.166 “User Parameters” (Switch 20, bit 0).  
❒ When executing [Send] or [Send Print] with the LAN-Fax Driver, and when the  
E-mail TX Result Report has not been arrived, the Result Report is printed  
out. See p.81 “Communication Result Report (Memory Transmission)”  
Printing  
Printing and Saving  
A Click [Print] or [Send & Print].  
You can print documents created us-  
ing Windows applications.  
Note  
6
You can also save documents in TIF  
format.  
❒ You can save the fax image in  
a file. See p.115 “Saving as  
Files”.  
Open the application document you  
want to print or create a new docu-  
ment, and then perform the following  
procedure.  
Editing Address Book  
For details, see Help.  
You can program and edit destina-  
tions in the address list using the Ad-  
dress Book.  
Note  
❒ You can select the time delay when  
problems such as paper running-  
out or paper jams are resolved. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
20 , bit 2/3/4/5).  
For details, see Help.  
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro-  
grams], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then  
click [Address Book].  
The Address Book display ap-  
pears.  
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].  
B
Select [LAN-Fax M6] in [Printer Name],  
and then click [OK].  
Note  
❒ If LAN-Fax Driver has already  
started up, click [Edit Address  
Book].  
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.  
Note  
❒ The setting method may differ  
depending on the application  
you are using. In all cases, select  
[LAN-Fax M6] for the printer.  
B Click [New/Browse...], and then se-  
lect the CSV file containing the  
address list to be edited.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Fax Documents from Computers  
C
Edit an existing destination or pro-  
gram a new one.  
Editing programmed destinations  
A Select the destination you  
Note  
want to edit in the list.  
❒ You can use files created in CSV  
format, as Address Book data.  
For this purpose, create CSV  
files that conform to a certain  
format. For more information,  
see Help.  
The destination should appear  
in gray.  
B Edit the data.  
C Click [Update].  
❒ To program the contents of the  
Address Book of this machine to  
the destination list, select the  
[Device Address] check box, then  
enter the destination key's regis-  
tration number in the [Device Ad-  
dress] field.  
Deleting programmed  
destinations  
A Select the destination you  
want to edit in the list.  
The destination should appear  
in gray.  
B Click [Delete].  
Programming new destinations  
C Click [Yes].  
A
Enter the destination and name.  
6
D Click [Close].  
Note  
E If you made changes to a destina-  
tion, a confirmation message ap-  
pears. To save the changes, click  
[Yes].  
❒ You can enter the name, com-  
pany name, department  
name, fax number, e-mail ad-  
dress, and IP-Fax address.  
The name and destination  
(Fax Number, E-mail Ad-  
dress or IP-Fax Address) can-  
not be omitted.  
If you do not want to save the  
changes and want to quit editing,  
click [No].  
To return to the editing display,  
click [Cancel].  
❒ For [Line:] under [Fax num-  
ber:], select the appropriate  
line type; G3, G3-2, G3-3, G3  
Dir. Auto, G3 PABX Auto, or  
PABX.  
Note  
❒
The confirmation dialog box does  
not appear when you have not  
made any changes after starting  
Address Book.  
❒ For [Protocol:] under [IP-Fax  
address:], select [H.323] or  
[SIP].  
B Click [Add].  
The destination is added to the  
destination list.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
-Using the machine's Address  
Book data in the destination  
list of the LAN-Fax  
-Managing facsimile functions  
using SmartDeviceMonitor for  
Admin  
You can save information about fax  
destinations registered to this ma-  
chine in a personal computer as a  
CSV file using “Address Information  
Management” in “SmartDeviceMoni-  
tor for Admin”. Saved CSV files can  
be inserted into the destination table  
of the LAN-Fax Driver by selecting  
[New/Reference] in Destination Table  
Editing Tool. Save the file again for  
the LAN-Fax Driver.  
You can check information about this  
machine's fax functions using a com-  
puter and save files on a computer us-  
ing SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin.  
You can use SmartDeviceMonitor for  
Admin to do the following:  
• Check information about fax desti-  
nations registered to this machine  
using “Address Information Man-  
agement”.  
• Save information about fax desti-  
nations registered to this machine  
in a personal computer as a CSV  
file using “Address Information  
Management”. Saved CSV files  
can be inserted into the destination  
list of the LAN-Fax Driver using  
the Destination List Editing Tool.  
Reference  
For details, see “SmartDeviceMon-  
itor for Admin” Help.  
Note  
6
❒ When destinations registered in  
groups by this machine are insert-  
ed into Destination Table Editing  
Tool, each person's destination is  
determined according to the fol-  
lowing order of priority (check be-  
fore inserting and changing the  
order of priority, if necessary): IP-  
Fax destination → Fax number →  
Mail address  
Note  
❒ For details about SmartDevice-  
Monitor for Admin and its installa-  
tion, see Printer Reference.  
❒ For details, see Network Guide and  
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin  
Help.  
❒ Depending on the machine type,  
you may not be able to use the ma-  
chine when it is updating the Ad-  
dress Book using CSV files  
(retrieved using SmartDeviceMon-  
itor for Admin) that contain user  
codes.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Fax Documents from Computers  
D Select a folder, and then enter a  
Editing Fax Cover Sheets  
file name.  
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor allows  
you to edit the format for fax cover  
sheets. It is necessary to create a cover  
sheet file before attaching a cover  
sheet to fax messages using LAN-Fax  
Driver.  
E Click [Save].  
Attaching a created cover sheet  
Use the following procedure to attach  
a created cover sheet file to a fax mes-  
sage.  
Creating a cover sheet  
A On the [File] menu, click [Print...].  
Use the following procedure to create  
a fax cover sheet.  
B Select “LAN-Fax M6” in “Printer  
Name”, and then click [OK].  
You can edit the items below using  
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor.  
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box appears.  
•
•
Company name as destination info.  
Department name as destination info.  
C Click [Edit Cover Sheet].  
The [Edit Cover Sheet] dialog box  
appears.  
• Person name as destination info.  
• Title of address as destination info.  
• Company name as sender info.  
• Department name as sender info.  
• Person name as sender info.  
• Telephone number as sender info.  
• Fax number as sender info.  
• Date  
6
D Select a cover sheet file from the  
drop-down list or after clicking  
[Browse...] in [Select Cover Sheet].  
Note  
❒ The selection made in [Select  
Cover Sheet] is not canceled un-  
less you select another file. If  
you want to change only desti-  
nation information, skip this  
• Message  
step and proceed to step  
.
E
Note  
❒ Cover sheet data is stored in its  
own format (using “fcp” as its ex-  
tension)  
E Select the type of information  
from [To:].  
Note  
A On the [Start] menu, point to [Pro-  
grams], [LAN-Fax Utilities], and then  
click [LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor].  
❒
You can select [Use Address Book],  
[To Whom It May Concern], [Edit  
Names], or [None]. Selecting [Edit  
Names] allows you to enter com-  
pany, department, and person  
names.  
The dialog box of LAN-Fax Cover  
Sheet Editor appears.  
B Edit the cover sheet.  
F To print the date, select the [With a  
Note  
Date] check box.  
❒ For details about operations, see  
Help.  
C Click [Save as...] on the [File] menu.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
G Enter the sender information.  
H Click [OK].  
Note  
I Specify a destination.  
❒ You can enter company, depart-  
ment, and person names, and  
telephone and fax numbers.  
J Click the [Send Options] tab and  
then select the [Attach a Cover  
Sheet] check box.  
❒ To add a message, select the  
[With a Message] check box, and  
then enter a message.  
K Click [Send].  
LAN-Fax Operation Messages  
Message  
Causes and Solutions  
Check the network connection.  
Check that the power is turned on.  
Cannot access the print-  
er. Click [retry] to send  
the data again.  
The number of destinations specified exceeds the maxi-  
mum possible. The maximum number of destinations  
that can be specified at one time is 500.  
The number of entries in  
Destinations exceed the  
limits. Up to 500 entries  
can be entered.  
6
The [LAN-Fax] dialog box is already open. Quit LAN-Fax  
once, and then start it up again.  
“LAN-Fax” has already  
been launched. Cannot  
launch it again.  
Available memory on the computer is insufficient. Quit  
applications currently not in use.  
Failed to allocate memory.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser  
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web  
Browser  
You can view received fax messages  
and their lists or print these messages  
using a Web Image Monitor on a net-  
work computer.  
With a user code (stored  
reception file) programmed  
A If you have programmed a user  
code, enter the code, and then  
press [OK].  
Note  
❒ You need to select “Store” as the  
“Reception File Setting” in the Fac-  
simile Features menu. See p.193  
“Storing or Printing Received Doc-  
uments”.  
A list of the received fax mes-  
sages appears.  
Note  
❒ If the programmed user code  
has been deleted using the  
Address Book Management  
function under System Set-  
tings, a message indicating  
incorrect user code entry ap-  
pears. If this is the case, re-  
program a user code. See  
p.195 “Setting a User for  
Viewing Received and  
Stored Documents”.  
❒ You can also check and manage  
the documents using DeskTop-  
Binder Lite. See p.139 “Managing  
Documents Saved in the Docu-  
ment Server from a Computer”.  
6
Reference  
“Using Web Image Monitor”, Net-  
work Guide  
Viewing, Printing, andDeleting  
Received Fax Messages Using  
a Web Image Monitor  
D Click the Property icon of the de-  
sired fax message.  
Note  
❒ To view a list of the fax messag-  
es, select the thumbnail display,  
detail display, or icon display.  
Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or  
[Icons].  
Use the following procedure to view  
and/or print received fax messages  
using a Web Image Monitor.  
Viewing received fax messages using a  
Web browser  
E View the content of the fax mes-  
sage.  
A Start a Web browser.  
Note  
❒ To enlarge the preview image,  
click [Enlarge Image]. Enlarge-  
ment cannot be performed  
without Acrobat Reader in-  
stalled. For more information,  
see Help on the Web Image  
Monitor.  
B Enter the machine's IP address in  
the [Address] field.  
C Click [Fax Received File] in the left  
pane.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
❒ You can change the printing or-  
der of selected multiple messag-  
es. You can also have messages  
printed on both sides of paper.  
For more information, see Help  
on the Web Image Monitor.  
F
To download the received fax mes-  
sage, click [PDF] or [Multi-page TIFF].  
Clicking [PDF] causes Acrobat  
Reader to be started and the mes-  
sage to be displayed.  
Clicking [Multi-page TIFF] causes a  
downloading confirmation win-  
dow to appear.  
G Click [OK].  
The display returns to that of step  
.
D
Note  
Deleting fax information using a Web  
browser  
❒ The method for downloading  
differs depending on the select-  
ed format. For more informa-  
tion, see Help on the Web Image  
Monitor.  
A Start a Web browser.  
B Enter the machine's IP address in  
the [Address] field.  
Printing fax information using a Web  
browser  
C Click [Fax Received File] in the left  
pane.  
A Start a Web browser.  
The list of received fax messages  
appears.  
6
B Enter the machine's IP address in  
the [Address] field.  
D
Click and check the check box be-  
side the fax message to be deleted.  
C Click [Fax Received File] in the left  
Note  
pane.  
❒ To view a list of the fax messag-  
es, select the thumbnail display,  
detail display, or icon display.  
Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or  
[Icons].  
The list of received fax messages  
appears.  
D
Click and select the check box be-  
side the fax message to be printed.  
Note  
E Click [Delete].  
F Click [Delete File].  
Note  
❒ To view a list of the fax messag-  
es, select the thumbnail display,  
detail display, or icon display.  
Click [Thumbnails], [Details], or  
[Icons].  
❒ To cancel deletion, press [Can-  
cel] before clicking [Delete File].  
E Click [Print].  
F Click [Start Print].  
Note  
❒
After selecting multiple messag-  
es, you can also cancel deletion  
of some of the selected messages.  
For more information, see Help  
on the Web Image Monitor.  
❒ To cancel printing, press [Can-  
cel] before clicking [Start Print].  
G Click [OK].  
The display returns to that of step  
.
D
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing Fax Information Using a Web Browser  
To edit machine properties  
already programmed  
Programming Destination  
Information from Web Browser  
A Click the radio button to the  
left of the machine you want to  
modify, and then click  
[Change].  
If the receiving machine is compliant  
with T.37 full mode Internet Fax, you  
can program the receiver's properties  
from Web Image Monitor. You can  
program the following properties:  
The [Edit User] page appears.  
B Set the properties for Internet  
Fax data format other than the  
mode selection.  
• Compression type  
• Paper size  
• Character size  
Note  
Note  
❒ If you change the mode to  
“Simple”, you cannot set ma-  
chine properties.  
❒ For the detailed description, see  
Help for Web Image Monitor.  
❒
When a receiver that is programmed  
as full mode in the Address Book  
returns a Reception Confirmation  
e-mail, the contents of the newly  
received e-mail overwrite the ex-  
isting information.  
C Click [OK] at the upper-right of  
the screen.  
The Address Book is displayed.  
6
Note  
❒ To cancel the setting, click  
[Cancel] in the upper-right of  
the screen.  
Reference  
p.55 “T.37 Full Mode”, Facsimile  
Reference <Basic Features>  
To add new receiver  
A Start the Web browser.  
A Click [Add].  
B Enter the IP address of the ma-  
chine you want to monitor after  
“http://” in the address field.  
The [Add User] page appears.  
B Check that [User] is selected in  
the dropdown menu.  
The top screen is displayed.  
C Enter the registration number,  
name, and e-mail address, then  
set the necessary properties.  
C Click [Login], and then enter the  
Administrator's name and pass-  
word.  
Note  
❒ You can set the Internet Fax  
data format after entering the  
e-mail address.  
D
Click [Address Book] in the left pane.  
The Address Book is displayed.  
E Set the Internet Fax data format.  
D Click [Full] under [Internet Fax  
data format:], and set the proper-  
ties according to the receiver's  
properties.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
Note  
❒ If you change the mode to  
“Simple”, you cannot set ma-  
chine properties.  
E Click [OK] in the upper-right of  
the screen.  
The Address Book is displayed.  
Note  
❒ To cancel the setting, click  
[Cancel] in the upper-right of  
the screen.  
F Close the Web browser.  
6
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Delivering Files Received by Fax  
Delivering Files Received by Fax  
ScanRouter EX Professional (sold separately) is also required as a delivery server. Desk-  
TopBinder Lite or DeskTopBinder Professional (sold separately) software must be in-  
stalled on your computer.  
Messages received by the machine  
can be viewed on or downloaded to a  
computer with the network delivery  
server, ScanRouter EX Professional.  
This is a useful function, enabling you  
to view and store messages on your  
computer without printing them.  
• You can check or download re-  
ceived messages stored in the  
delivery server inbox using  
DeskTopBinder Professional  
Lite or DeskTopBinder Profes-  
sional.  
Limitation  
Using the delivery server, you can  
eliminate the task of retrieving and  
delivering messages.  
❒
Confidential messages are also  
forwarded to the delivery  
server.  
❖ Functions  
Delivery server provides the fol-  
lowing functions:  
Note  
❒ To view or download mes-  
sages stored in the delivery  
server inbox, you need to in-  
stall the separately sold  
DeskTopBinder on your  
computer.  
6
• Use the delivery server to asso-  
ciate incoming messages (Con-  
fidential ID, SUB Code, Own  
Name, and Own Fax Number)  
with receivers, so messages are  
delivered to the intended re-  
ceivers.  
❒ To send received messages to  
your computer as e-mail at-  
tachments, you need to have  
a ScanRouter EX Profession-  
al-compatible e-mail pro-  
gram on your computer.  
•
You can select the delivery meth-  
od for incoming messages: “Save  
in the delivery server inbox”,  
“Send as an e-mail attachment”,  
or “Save in the designated PC  
folder”. Incoming messages  
with no Confidential ID, ID  
Override Confidential Trans-  
mission, SUB Code, Own Name,  
or Own Fax Number are saved  
in the delivery server inbox. You  
can also set so that the received  
messages are stored in the spec-  
ified delivery server inbox ac-  
cording to the used line for  
reception.  
❒ To create a network using the  
delivery server, settings  
must be specified in the User  
Tools of the machine. Set-  
tings must also be specified  
on the delivery server. See  
“File Transfer”, General Set-  
tings Guide.  
❒ See ScanRouter EX Profes-  
sional Help or instructions  
for more information on the  
delivery server (ScanRouter  
EX Professional).  
❒ For information about Desk-  
TopBinder, see DeskTop-  
Binder's manual and Help.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax via Computer  
6
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Simplifying the Operation  
Programs  
If you regularly send messages to a  
particular destination or transmit us-  
ing the same functions, you can save  
repetitive keypad operations by reg-  
istering this information in a Key-  
stroke Program.  
Limitation  
❒ You cannot register the following  
using program No.1:  
• Any destination  
• Store File  
• Polling Transmission  
• Sender Settings  
Registering and Changing  
Keystroke Programs  
• Specifying a stored file  
• Enter Subject of E-mail Options  
Keystroke Programs can be recalled  
by just pressing a Quick Dial key. The  
following procedure can be used to  
program a new Keystroke Program or  
overwrite an old one.  
Note  
❒ The maximum number of pro-  
grams you can register is 100.  
❒ Use the same procedure to register  
and change programs. In step E,  
select the program number you  
want to change.  
You can register the following items  
in Keystroke Programs:  
•
Memory Transmission, Internet Fax  
Transmission, Immediate Trans-  
mission, destinations (up to 500  
numbers), character size, original  
type, line selection (only when a  
destination is specified using num-  
ber keys), Complete Stamp, time-  
specified transmission, confiden-  
tial transmission, automatic thick-  
ness, manual thickness, scan size,  
different-size original, file attach-  
ment, specification of two-page  
spread original, delivery-limit-  
specified transmission, polling  
transmission, polling reception, re-  
lay request transmission, two-sid-  
ed original transmission, text  
input, reception confirmation set-  
tings, BCC transmission settings,  
protocol selection, each optional  
setting's function.  
❒
The method of registering or chang-  
ing programs for the copy function  
is different from that of the fax  
function.  
A
Prepare for registering the program.  
Note  
❒ The procedure for program-  
ming differs depending on the  
items you want to register.  
❒ Press the {Clear Modes} key to  
cancel programming.  
Example of registering a program  
using Send Later with the fax  
number “0123456789”  
A Press {0}, {1}, {2}, {3}, {4}, {5},  
{6}, {7}, {8}, {9} using the  
number keys.  
•
Program name (up to 20 characters)  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simplifying the Operation  
B Perform the Send Later setting  
till the procedure of pressing  
[OK] to return to the standby  
mode.  
❒ When you change a Keystroke  
Program, press [Register] after  
pressing the program number  
you want to change. If you  
make a mistake, press [Do not  
Reference  
p.3 “Sending at a Specific  
Time (Send Later)”  
Register] and return to step  
.
E
F Enter the program name, and then  
press [OK].  
B Make sure that the machine is in  
facsimile mode and the standby  
display is shown.  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Backspace] or [Delete All], and  
then try again.  
Note  
❒
If the standby display is not  
shown, press the  
{
Facsimile  
}
key.  
❒ You should register the pro-  
C Press the {Program} key.  
gram name.  
❒ To cancel a programmed pro-  
gram, press [Cancel]. The dis-  
play returns to that of step  
.
E
ZLFS310N  
Reference  
D Make sure that [Register] is select-  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
ed.  
7
Registering a priority function using a  
program  
You can select whether or not the  
function registered in program No. 1  
will be set after the power is turned  
on or the {Clear Modes} key is pressed.  
After registering a function in pro-  
gram No. 1, select [Program No.1] for  
[Change Initial Mode] on the Facsimile  
Features menu. See p.144 “General  
Settings/Adjustment”.  
E
Select a program number in which  
“*Not Stored” is shown.  
Limitation  
❒ You cannot register the following  
using program No.1:  
• Any destination  
• Store File  
• Polling Transmission  
• Sender Settings  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel] and select a program  
number again.  
• Specifying a stored file  
• Enter Subject of E-mail Options  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programs  
Changing a program name  
Deleting a Program  
A Make sure that the machine is in  
facsimile mode and the standby  
display is shown.  
A Make sure that the machine is in  
facsimile mode and the standby  
display is shown.  
Note  
Note  
❒ If the standby display is not  
shown, press the {Facsimile}  
key.  
❒ If the standby display is not  
shown, press the {Facsimile}  
key.  
B Press the {Program} key.  
B Press the {Program} key.  
ZLFS310N  
ZLFS310N  
C Press [Change Name].  
C Press [Delete].  
7
D Select the program number of the  
D Select the program number you  
name you want to change.  
want to delete.  
E Enter a new program name, and  
E Press [Yes].  
then press [OK].  
Note  
Note  
❒ Press [No] not to delete the pro-  
❒
Press [Cancel] to cancel the change,  
and proceed to step  
gram. The display returns to  
.
F
that of step  
.
C
F Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
F Press [Exit].  
The standby display appears.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simplifying the Operation  
E Press the {Start} key.  
Using a Program  
The fax number and specified time  
are shown on the display, and the  
machine starts to scan the original.  
Note  
❒ Using the program causes the pre-  
vious settings to be cleared.  
Transmission starts at the specified  
time.  
❒ If you have no programmed desti-  
nations or scan settings as pro-  
grams, select the program number,  
and then enter the fax number of  
the destination and select the scan  
settings you require.  
A Make sure that the machine is in  
facsimile mode and the standby  
display is shown.  
Note  
❒ If the standby display is not  
shown, press the {Facsimile}  
key.  
B Place the original.  
C Press the {Program} key.  
7
ZLFS310N  
D Confirm that [Recall] is selected,  
and press the registered program  
No.  
The standby display appears.  
Then, the programmed fax num-  
ber is shown. Transmission Mode  
is selected.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Document Server  
Using the Document Server  
The Document Server can store docu-  
ments from various applications.  
❒ You can specify whether or not the  
machine automatically deletes  
documents from the Document  
Server after a certain number of  
days. The delete function is pre-  
configured with the software and  
automatically deletes any stored  
document that is more than three  
days (72 hours) old. You can  
change the setting with “Auto De-  
lete File”under “System Settings” .  
See “Administrator Tools — Auto  
Delete File”, General Settings Guide.  
The documents that are stored using  
the facsimile function are available to  
transmit by facsimile.  
Storing in the Document Server en-  
ables the following:  
• Once stored, a document can be  
sent out as many times as you  
want, just by selecting it.  
• Storing a document does not use  
facsimile memory.  
❒ You can store approximately 9,000  
pages (ITU-T No.4 chart) in the  
Document Server, using the copy,  
facsimile, printer, and scanner  
functions.  
You can send and print multiple  
stored documents as a single docu-  
ment, and also send them with  
scanned originals at the same time.  
Follow the instructions under [Select  
Stored File] in [Sub TX Mode] when  
sending or printing stored docu-  
ments. See p.67 “Sending a Stored  
File”.  
❒ The Document Server has a memo-  
ry capacity of 2,000 documents  
maximum.  
7
❒ You can store up to 1,000 pages per  
document.  
Reference  
❒ You cannot check received and  
stored documents through the  
Document Server. See p.34 “Print-  
ing Received and Stored Docu-  
ments”.  
“What You Can Do with This Ma-  
chine”, General Settings Guide  
Important  
❒ Data stored in the machine might  
be lost if some kind of failure oc-  
curs. The manufacturer shall not  
be responsible for any damage that  
might result from the loss of data.  
Note  
❒ Stored documents are not deleted  
even when there is a power failure,  
or the main power switch is turned  
off.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simplifying the Operation  
C Press [Stored File].  
Storing a Document  
You can store and send a document at  
the same time. You can also just store  
a document.  
❖ File names  
Scanned documents are automati-  
cally assigned names like  
“FAX0001” or “FAX0002”. See  
p.135 “Setting a file name”.  
D
Select [Store & Transmit] or [Store only].  
Select [Store & Transmit] to send  
❖ User Names  
documents after they are stored.  
You can set this function if neces-  
sary to know who and what de-  
partments stored documents in the  
machine. See p.135 “Programming  
a user name”.  
Select [Store only] to store docu-  
ments.  
❖ Password  
You can set this function so as not  
to send to unspecified people. See  
p.135 “Setting a password”.  
Note  
7
❒ You can change file names and  
user names. See p.136 “Changing  
Information of Stored Docu-  
ments”.  
Note  
❒ When [Store only] is selected,  
“pppppppppp” is  
shown.  
A Make sure that the machine is in  
facsimile mode and the standby  
display is shown.  
E Press [File Info. Setting], and then  
set the user name, file name, and  
password as necessary.  
If the standby display is not  
shown, press the {Facsimile} key.  
B Place the original, and then select  
the scan settings you require.  
Reference  
p.13 “Placing Originals”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Document Server  
❒ To set an non-programmed  
user name, press [Non-pro-  
grammed Name], and then en-  
ter the name. User names  
entered by pressing [Non-pro-  
grammed Name] are not pro-  
grammed into the user code.  
Note  
❒ If you are not setting a user  
name, file name, or password,  
proceed to step  
.
F
❒ You cannot change multiple  
documents at once.  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
Programming a user name  
Note  
C Press [OK].  
❒ Set a user name from those pro-  
grammed in the user code. User  
code is programmed in System  
Settings. See “Registering a  
New User Code”, General Set-  
tings Guide.  
Setting a file name  
A Press [File Name].  
A Press [User Name].  
7
B Enter the file name, and then  
press [OK].  
B Press the user name to be pro-  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
grammed, and then press [OK].  
C Press [OK].  
Setting a password  
A Press [Password].  
Note  
❒ Press the title key to switch  
between titles.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simplifying the Operation  
B Enter a password using the  
number keys, and then press  
[#].  
Changing Information of  
Stored Documents  
You can change the file name, user  
name, and password of stored docu-  
ments.  
To change a stored document, delete  
the document you no longer need,  
and then reprogram the new docu-  
ment. See p.138 “Deleting a Stored  
Document”.  
Note  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then reenter your password.  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit steps A. See p.144  
“General Settings/Adjustment”.  
❒ You can enter up to four to  
eight digits.  
A Press [Sub TX Mode].  
C Enter the password again, and  
then press [#].  
D Press [OK].  
7
Note  
❒ Press [Change] to enter a dif-  
ferent password.  
E Press [OK].  
F Press [OK].  
B Select [Select Stored File].  
G If you have selected [Store & Trans-  
mit], specify the receiver.  
C Select [Manage / Delete File], and  
then press the document to be  
changed.  
Note  
❒ If you have selected [Store only],  
proceed to step  
.
H
H Press the {Start} key.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Document Server  
❒
To set a non-programmed user  
name, press [Non-programmed  
Name], and then enter the  
name.  
D
If you select a document for which  
a password is set, enter the pass-  
word, and then press [OK].  
When a selected file does not have  
❒ User names entered by press-  
ing [Non-programmed Name]  
are not programmed into the  
user code.  
a password, proceed to step  
.
E
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
Changing the file name  
E Change the desired information  
A Press [Change File Name].  
of the stored document.  
B Press [Backspace] or [Delete All],  
and then re-enter the file name.  
7
Changing a user name  
Reference  
“Entering Text” General Set-  
A Press [Change User Name].  
B Press [Clear].  
tings Guide  
C Press [OK].  
The user name is deleted.  
Changing the password  
A Press [Change Password].  
B Press upper [Change].  
C Enter the new user name, and  
then press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Press the title keys to switch  
between titles.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simplifying the Operation  
C Enter a new password using  
the number keys, and then  
press [#].  
C Press [Manage / Delete File].  
D Select the document you want to  
delete.  
D Press lower [Change].  
E Enter the password again, and  
then press [#].  
F Press [OK].  
F Press [Exit].  
G Press [OK].  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
Deleting a Stored Document  
❒ You can also delete multiple  
7
documents at once.  
Use this function to delete stored doc-  
uments.  
With a programmed password  
Note  
A
Enter a password using the num-  
ber keys, and then press [OK].  
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. Using the key allows  
you to omit steps A. See p.144  
“General Settings/Adjustment”.  
A Press [Sub TX Mode].  
E Press [Delete File].  
F Press [Delete].  
Note  
❒ If you do not want to delete the  
document, press [Do not Delete].  
B Press [Select Stored File].  
G Press [Exit].  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Document Server  
Note  
H Press [OK].  
❒ When you send a document using  
Fax, if the registration number in  
the Address Book registered to the  
device is specified, you can send  
the document to a fax number  
only. Documents cannot be sent  
even if e-mail and IP-Fax address-  
es are already registered.  
The standby display appears.  
Managing Documents Saved  
in the Document Server from a  
Computer  
Using DeskTopBinder  
Using a Web browser  
Fax documents saved in the Docu-  
ment Server can be viewed and con-  
trolled from a network computer  
with DeskTopBinder installed.  
Fax documents saved in the Docu-  
ment Server can be viewed using a  
Web Image Monitor on a network  
computer. These fax documents can  
also be downloaded to the computer's  
hard disk. See p.123 “Viewing Fax In-  
formation Using a Web Browser”.  
The following operations are avail-  
able using the computer:  
•
Displaying documents (Easy View-  
er)  
• Displaying document properties  
(Properties)  
• Deleting documents (Delete)  
7
• Copying documents to a computer  
(Copy)  
• Printing documents (Print from  
Document Server)  
• Exporting documents as files (Ex-  
port Document)  
• Importing documents into a com-  
puter (Import Document)  
For more information, see DeskTop-  
Binder's manual and Help.  
Limitation  
❒ If you use a link in Auto Document  
Link the versions earlier than  
DeskTopBinder Lite or Profession-  
al version 4.0.0.0., set the SNTP  
Server Address as “0.0.0.0” on  
Web Image Monitor. If the address  
is not set correctly, documents can-  
not be properly imported. For de-  
tails about import settings, see  
Help for Web Image Monitor.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simplifying the Operation  
7
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Facsimile Features  
Function List  
The User Tools allow you to program your identification, store frequently used  
numbers and settings, and customize default settings to meet your needs.  
The User Tools are grouped by functions so that you can quickly and easily find  
the desired User Tool.  
❖ General Settings/Adjustment  
Description  
Reference  
Default Transmission Mode and scan set-  
tings. When the power is turned on, settings  
specified here are selected:  
p.144 “General Settings/Adjustment”  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Memory / Immed. Transmission Switch  
Text Size Priority  
Original Type Priority  
Auto Image Density  
Adjust Scan Density  
Select Title  
Change Initial Mode  
Adjust Sound Volume  
p.83 “Adjusting the Volume”, Facsimile Refer-  
ence <Basic Features>  
•
Program Fax Information  
p.75 “Initial Settings and Adjustments”, Fac-  
simile Reference <Basic Features>  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scan End Reset  
TX Stamp Priority  
Line Priority Setting  
Program Economy Time  
On Hook Mode Release Time  
Quick Operation Key  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile Features  
❖ Reception Settings  
Description  
Reference  
Allows you to switch the following reception p.147 “Reception Settings”  
functions on or off:  
•
•
Switch Reception Mode  
Authorized RX  
p.175 “Authorized RX (Authorized Recep-  
tion)”  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Forwarding  
p.175 “Forwarding”  
RX File Print Qty  
2 Sided Print  
p.176 “Reception File Print Qty”  
p.97 “Two-Sided Printing”  
p.100 “Reverse Order Printing”  
p.177 “Paper Tray”  
RX Reverse Printing  
Paper Tray  
Specify Tray for Lines  
Checkered Mark  
Center Mark  
p.105 “Specifying Tray for Lines”  
p.96 “Checkered Mark”  
p.96 “Center Mark”  
Print Reception Time  
p.97 “Reception Time”  
❖ E-mail Settings  
Description  
Reference  
•
•
•
Internet Fax Settings  
p.148 “E-mail Settings”  
Max. E-mail Size  
SMTP RX File Delivery Setttings  
8
❖ IP-Fax Settings  
Description  
Reference  
•
•
•
•
•
Enable H.323  
p.150 “IP-Fax Settings”  
Enable SIP  
H.323 Settings  
SIP Settings  
Program / Change / Delete Gateway  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function List  
❖ Administrator Tools  
Description  
Reference  
•
Program / Change / Delete Standard  
p.155 “Administrator Setting”  
Message  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Store / Change / Delete Auto Document  
Program / Change / Delete Scan Size  
Print Journal  
Transmission Page Count  
Forwarding  
Memory Lock RX  
ECM  
Parameter Setting  
Program Special Sender  
Box Setting  
Transfer Report  
Program Confidential ID  
Program Polling ID  
Program Memory Lock ID  
Select Dial / Push Phone  
Reception File Setting  
Stored RX File User Setting  
Menu Protection Settings  
8
-Displays  
• Each menu appears in each tab.  
• You can switch the display by pressing [U Prev.] or [T Next].  
• The selected item is highlighted.  
• When you have made all required settings, press [OK]. If [OK] is not pressed,  
the new settings might be canceled.  
• Press [Cancel] to cancel the new settings. The previous display appears.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile Features  
Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)  
Customize the facsimile settings ac-  
Reference  
p.141 “Function List”  
cording to the operations to be fre-  
quently performed.  
D Follow the displayed instructions  
Note  
to change the default, and then  
❒ The machine allows you to change  
press [OK].  
the facsimile defaults in a mode  
that is not the facsimile mode. Af-  
ter changing the defaults, select  
facsimile mode again. This section  
describes the facsimile defaults  
that the machine allows you to cus-  
tomize.  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel].  
Quitting Default Settings  
❒ Customized facsimile defaults are  
kept until the defaults are changed  
again. The new settings are not  
cancelled by turning off the main  
power switch or the Operation  
switch or pressing the {Clear  
Modes} key.  
A After changing the defaults, press  
[Exit] on the main menu display  
for default settings.  
The standby display appears.  
Reference  
For the items that can be changed  
using System Settings, see “User  
Tools (System Settings)”, General  
Settings Guide.  
8
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The main menu display for default  
settings appears.  
Note  
❒ You can also press the {User  
Tools/Counter} key to quit the  
main menu display for default  
settings.  
General Settings/Adjustment  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
❖ Memory / Immed. Transmission Switch  
Use this function to specify the  
Transmission Mode for document  
transmission.  
The menu display for facsimile de-  
fault settings appears.  
C Select the item that you want to  
change.  
• Memory Transmission  
The corresponding setting display  
appears.  
• Immediate Transmission  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)  
❖ Text Size Priority  
Note  
Use this function to specify the  
character size of your originals for  
scanning.  
❒ You cannot select Program  
No.1 if program No.1 has not  
been programmed with pri-  
ority functions.  
• Standard  
• Detail  
❖ Adjust Sound Volume  
• Super Fine (expansion memory  
Use this function to adjust the  
sound volume during On Hook  
Mode and Immediate Transmis-  
sion.  
See p.83 “Adjusting the Volume”,  
Facsimile Reference <Basic Features>.  
required)  
❖ Original Type Priority  
Use this function to specify the  
type of originals for scanning.  
• Text  
• Default ID TX  
• At Transmission  
• At Reception  
• At Dialing  
• Text / Photo  
• Photo  
❖ Auto Image Density  
Use this function to prioritize auto-  
matic Image Density for scanning  
your originals.  
• At Printing  
❖ Program Fax Information  
See p.75 “Initial Settings and Ad-  
justments”, Facsimile Reference <Ba-  
sic Features>.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Adjust Scan Density  
Use this function to specify the  
scan density of your originals.  
• Fax Header  
• Own Name  
8
• Own Fax Number  
❖ Select Title  
❖ Scan End Reset  
Use this function for selecting the  
title to be shown on the destination  
list.  
Use this function to return to the  
initial settings each time an origi-  
nal is scanned.  
• Title 1  
• Title 2  
• Title 3  
• On  
• Off  
❖ TX Stamp Priority  
Use this function to press a TX  
stamp.  
❖ Change Initial Mode  
Use this function to select whether  
contents registered in program  
No.1 are to be used as the initial  
settings after the power is turned  
on or the {Clear Modes} key is  
pressed:  
• On  
• Off  
• Standard  
• Program No.1  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile Features  
• Stored File  
❖ Line Priority Setting  
Use this function to specify the line  
of usage.  
• Send Later  
• Auto Document  
• 2 Sided Original  
• Closed Network  
Note  
❒ The display may differ depend-  
ing on the line type you have.  
• Polling Transmission (Polling  
Transmission)  
❖ Program Economy Time  
Use this function for specifying a  
time for transmission when call  
charges are low. See p.3 “Sending  
at a Specific Time (Send Later)”.  
• Polling Reception (Polling Re-  
ception)  
• Fax Header Print  
• Label Insertion  
Limitation  
• RX File Status (Reception File  
❒
You can program only one Econ-  
omy Time.  
Status)  
• Forwarding  
Note  
• Transfer Request  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key be-  
fore pressing [OK], and then try  
again.  
• Switch RX Mode (Reception  
Mode Switch)  
• Manual E-mail RX  
(when the Internet Fax is set to  
ON.)  
❖ On Hook Mode Release Time  
Use this function to specify a time  
to cancel On Hook mode after you  
transmit using On Hook dialing.  
• TX Status Report (Transmission  
Status Report)  
• Sender Settings  
8
• 1 minute  
• 3 minutes  
• 5 minutes  
• 10 minutes  
• E-mail TX Results(E-mail Trans-  
mission Results)  
Up to three functions can be pro-  
grammed into a Quick Operation  
keys.  
❖ Quick Operation Key  
A Select Quick Operation Key  
Frequently used functions pro-  
grammed as Quick Operation keys  
are shown on the menu immedi-  
ately after the power is turned on.  
The Quick Operation keys can be  
programmed with the following  
functions:  
you want to program.  
B Select the function you want to  
program in the Quick Opera-  
tion Key .  
• Journal  
• TX Status Display (Transmis-  
sion File Status)  
• Print Confidential RX File (Print  
Confidential Reception)  
• Print Memory Lock File  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)  
❖ RX Reverse Printing (Reception Re-  
verse Printing)  
Note  
❒
Functions that appear dimmed  
have already been set.  
Specify whether or not received  
fax messages are to be printed  
from the last page received.  
Reception Settings  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Switch Reception Mode  
Specify the method for receiving  
fax messages.  
❖ Paper Tray  
Use this function to print fax mes-  
sages received from programmed  
senders and fax messages from  
other senders, using different pa-  
per trays. See p.174 “Paper Tray”.  
Display of tray names may differ  
depending on the options in-  
stalled.  
• Manual Reception  
• Auto Reception  
❖ Authorized RX (Authorized Reception)  
Specify whether or not unwanted  
fax messages are to be screened  
out.  
• Tray 1  
• On  
• Tray 2  
• Off  
• Tray 3 (option)  
• Tray 4 (option)  
• Auto Select  
• LCT (option)  
❖ Forwarding  
Specify whether or not received  
fax messages are to be forwarded  
to a programmed receiver.  
• On  
❖ Specify Tray for Lines  
Specify a paper tray for each line  
(telephone, Internet Fax, IP-Fax).  
• Off  
8
❖ RX File Print Qty (Reception File Print  
Quantity)  
• On  
• Off  
Specify the number of copies to be  
printed for each fax message re-  
ceived.  
A Select [On] to select a paper tray.  
• 1 to 10 set(s)  
❖ 2 Sided Print  
Specify whether or not received  
fax messages are to be printed on  
both sides of paper.  
• On  
• Off  
Note  
❒ If you select [Off], the re-  
ceived fax is delivered to a  
default tray.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile Features  
B Select the line type.  
❖ Print Reception Time  
Specify whether or not received  
date and time are to be printed at  
the bottom of received fax messag-  
es.  
• On  
• Off  
E-mail Settings  
C Select a tray to deliver the re-  
ceived paper onto, and then  
press [OK].  
❖ Internet Fax Settings  
You can select to display  
or  
not. When you want to send an In-  
ternet Fax, set ON to display the  
icon.  
• On  
• Off  
❖ Max. E-mail Size  
Make this setting when you want  
to limit the size of e-mail messages  
that are transmitted, if receivers  
limit e-mail size, or you cannot  
send large size e-mail for some rea-  
son. When this function is set to on,  
transmission of e-mail that exceeds  
the set size is aborted.  
Note  
❒ If you want to specify anoth-  
er line type, repeat from step  
B.  
8
❖ Checkered Mark  
Specify whether or not a checkered  
mark is to be printed on the first  
page of received fax messages.  
• On  
• Off  
• On  
• Off  
Note  
❒ When e-mail exceeds the maxi-  
mum file size, an Error Report is  
output, and the e-mail is delet-  
ed.  
❖ Center Mark  
Specify whether or not a center  
mark is to be printed halfway  
down the left side and at the top  
center of each page received.  
❒ Even when e-mail does not ex-  
ceed the size limit, it may be re-  
jected if it does not meet the  
requirements of the server set-  
tings.  
• On  
• Off  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)  
A Press [On].  
When the authorized e-mail ad-  
dress is set to “@aaa.abcd.com”:  
abc@aaa.abcd.com - accepted  
def@aaa.xyz.com - not accepted  
abc@abcd.com - not accepted  
Note  
❒ No Error Report is output even  
when e-mail is discarded.  
A Press [On].  
B Enter the maximum e-mail size  
using the number keys.  
B Press [Change], and then enter  
the sending e-mail address with  
transmission permission.  
Note  
❒ Maximum e-mail size can be  
between 64 and 102400 KB.  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Cancel] or the {Clear/Stop}  
key, and then enter again.  
8
C Press [OK].  
❖ SMTP RX File Delivery Settings (SMTP  
Reception File Delivery Settings)  
Note  
This function is available on sys-  
tems that allow routing of e-mail  
received via SMTP. See p.93 “Rout-  
ing E-mail Received via SMTP”.  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Backspace] or [Delete All], and  
then enter again.  
C Press [OK] twice.  
• On  
• Off  
When an authorized e-mail ad-  
dress is set, e-mail received from  
addresses that do not match the  
authorized address is discarded,  
and an error message is returned  
to the SMTP server.  
The authorized e-mail address is  
compared with the addresses of e-  
mail originators, as illustrated by  
the following examples.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile Features  
❖ Enable H.323  
Specify whether or not H.323 is  
IP-Fax Settings  
used for IP-Fax transmission.  
Make settings to use IP-Fax.  
• On  
• Off  
Set H.323 for the gatekeeper, SIP for  
SIP server, and gateway for G3 fax if  
necessary. Check the settings of the  
network to which this machine is con-  
nected before making settings.  
❖ Enable SIP  
Specify whether or not SIP is used  
for IP-Fax transmission.  
• On  
• Off  
Note  
❒ The following characters can be  
used for registration of the alias  
telephone number in H.323 Set-  
ting. Make sure you enter these  
characters correctly:  
❖ H.323 Settings  
Set the IP address and alias tele-  
phone number of the gatekeeper.  
Note  
• Numbers  
❒ If you select “On” using the  
User Parameters, you can use  
the gatekeeper server. See p.166  
“User Parameters”(switch 34,  
bit 0)  
• Symbols (# and *)  
❒ The following characters can be  
used for registration of the SIP  
User Name in SIP Setting. Make  
sure you enter these characters  
correctly:  
A Press [H.323 Settings].  
• Alphanumerical lower and up-  
per cases  
• The 21 symbols in the table be-  
low.  
8
;
+
.
?
$
!
:
,
&
-
=
_
~
)
*
#
B Press [Change] for each proper-  
ty.  
‘
(
%
/
@
❒ Enter the correct IP addresses for  
the gatekeeper, SIP server and  
gateway, which you have been in-  
formed by the network Adminis-  
trator, using numbers and a period  
(“.”).  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)  
C Enter the IP address and alias  
telephone number and press  
[OK].  
Note  
❒ A proxy server relays call re-  
quests and responses.  
The screen returns to that of  
Step B.  
❒ A redirect server processes  
request destination inquiries.  
❒ A registrar server registers  
location information of user  
agents (which correspond to  
telephones or facsimiles on  
public telephone lines) on an  
IP network.  
C Enter the IP address and SIP  
user name, and then press [OK].  
The screen returns to that of  
Step B.  
D Press [OK].  
❖ SIP Settings  
Set the SIP server IP address and  
SIP user name.  
Note  
❒ If you select “On” using the  
User Parameters, you can use  
the SIP server. See p.166 “User  
Parameters”(switch 34, bit 1)  
A Press [SIP Settings].  
D Press [OK].  
❖ Program / Change / Delete Gateway  
Register, change, or delete the  
gateway used for transmission to  
IP-Fax.  
8
• Registering or changing a gate-  
way  
A Press [Program / Change / Delete  
Gateway].  
B Press [Change] for each proper-  
ty.  
B Check [Program / Change] is  
selected.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile Features  
C Press a gateway to register.  
❒ For documents sent using  
a gateway to G3 Fax, ID  
numbers can be used. If  
the first several digits of  
IP-Fax number and the  
gateway-specific ID num-  
ber are identical, docu-  
ments can be transmitted  
using the registered digits  
of the gateway. For exam-  
ple, if both 03 and 04 have  
been registered as gateway  
number while 0312345678  
is also specified, docu-  
ments can be transmitted  
via a gateway for which 03  
is used as ID number.  
When registering a new gate-  
way, press [*Not pro-  
grammed.].  
D Press [Change] for [Prefix].  
❒ When you wish to use the  
gateways regardless of the  
IP-Fax destination num-  
bers, register only the  
gateway addresses with-  
out registering the ID  
Numbers.  
E Enter the Prefix using the  
number keys, and then press  
[OK].  
F Select a protocol.  
8
G Press [Change] for Gateway  
Address.  
Note  
❒
To change the existing Pre-  
fix, press [Clear], and then  
enter a new ID number.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing User Tools (Facsimile Features)  
H Enter the gateway address,  
and then press [OK].  
Note  
❒ If you do not want to de-  
lete the gateway you have  
selected, press [Do not De-  
lete].  
The screen returns to that of  
Step G.  
❒ The screen returns to that  
of Step B.  
D Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒
To delete another gateway,  
repeat steps B and C.  
I Press [OK].  
• Deleting a gateway  
A Press [Program / Change / Delete  
Gateway].  
B Press [Delete], and then select  
8
a gateway to delete.  
C Press [Delete] on the confir-  
mation message.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Facsimile Features  
8
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Administrator Setting  
Administrator Tools List  
You can program, change, or delete standard messages and auto documents.  
You can also set the line type for the machine connection, program various IDs  
(including a Polling ID), fax destinations, and many other items. In addition, you  
can check the number of documents transmitted and received.  
Function name  
Description  
Reference  
Program / Change / Delete  
Standard Message  
You can program, change, or p.157 “Programming, Chang-  
delete standard messages  
printed at the top of the first  
page of each incoming mes-  
sage.  
ing, and Deleting Standard  
Messages”  
Store / Change / Delete Auto You can program, change, or p.158 “Storing, Changing, and  
Document  
delete pages stored as auto  
documents.  
Deleting an Auto Document”  
Program / Change / Delete  
Scan Size  
You can program, change, or p.160 “Programming, Chang-  
cancel frequently used scan  
sizes.  
ing and Deleting a Scan Size”  
Print Journal  
Prints a Journal.  
p.162 “Printing Journal”  
Transmission Page Count  
Checks the transmission and p.162 “Counters”  
reception, and totals on the  
display.  
Forwarding  
Transfers received messages  
to a programmed receiver  
(forwarding destination).  
p.162 “Forwarding”  
Memory Lock RX  
Switches the Memory Lock to p.165 “Memory Lock”  
on or off. To use it, program  
an ID for printing a message  
received in Memory Lock  
mode.  
ECM  
If part of the transmission fails p.165 “ECM (Error Correction  
due to a telephone line fault,  
this function resends the  
failed part automatically.  
Mode)”  
Parameter Setting  
Allows you to change and  
print the function settings to  
meet your needs.  
p.166 “User Parameters”  
Program Special Sender  
By programming particular  
receivers as Special Sender in ing Special Senders”  
advance, you can have Special  
p.174 “Programming/Chang-  
Senders treated differently.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Function name  
Description  
Reference  
Box Setting  
By using SUB and SEP Codes p.180 “Box Settings”  
with these functions, you can  
send messages to another par-  
ty's box, and retrieve messag-  
es stored in boxes.  
Transfer Report  
Before using Transfer Re-  
quest, you need this Transfer  
Report setting.  
p.190 “Transfer Report”  
Program Confidential ID  
Program Polling ID  
Registers an ID required for  
Confidential communication. dential ID”  
p.191 “Programming a Confi-  
Registers an ID required for  
Polling communication.  
p.192“Programminga Polling  
ID”  
Program Memory Lock ID  
Select Dial / Push Phone  
Registers an ID required for  
Memory Lock reception.  
p.192 “Programming a Memo-  
ry Lock ID”  
Selects a line type when you  
connect the machine to a G3  
analog line.  
p.193 “Selecting Dial/Push  
Phone”  
Note  
❒
This function is not avail-  
able in some areas.  
Reception File Setting  
Selects whether received doc- p.193 “Storing or Printing Re-  
uments are saved on the hard ceived Documents”  
disk to be printed later or  
printed immediately without  
being saved.  
Stored RX File User Setting  
Menu Protection Settings  
Set the password to view re-  
p.195 “Setting a User for  
ceived and stored documents Viewing Received and Stored  
using a Web Image Monitor or Documents”  
DeskTopBinder Lite.  
9
Set protection so only the Ad- p.196 “Menu Protection Set-  
ministrator can change menu tings”  
settings.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
Using Administrator Settings  
Programming or changing  
standard messages  
Programming, Changing, and  
Deleting Standard Messages  
A Check [Program / Change] is se-  
Use this function to program stan-  
dard messages to be printed at the top  
of the first page of the original. It is  
useful for personalizing messages  
such as sending greetings.  
lected.  
Note  
❒ You can program three standard  
messages. You cannot change the  
“Confidential”, “Urgent”, “Please  
phone”, or “Copy to corres ...”  
messages.  
B
Program or change the message.  
Select the message you want to  
program or change.  
❒ Use the same procedure to pro-  
gram and change your messages.  
C Enter a new message.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
D Press [OK].  
Note  
❒
❒
To program another message,  
repeat the procedure from  
step A.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
9
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
To cancel a registration, press  
[Cancel].  
D Press [Program / Change / Delete Stan-  
dard Message].  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
• Scan settings (resolution, original  
Deleting Standard Messages  
type, and image density)  
• Irregular scan area  
A Press [Delete], and then select  
the message you want to de-  
lete.  
• Document name (16 characters  
maximum)  
Important  
❒ When about one hour passes after  
power of the machine is turned off,  
all fax messages stored in memory  
are lost. If any messages have been  
lost for this reason, a Power Failure  
Report is automatically printed  
when the operation switch is  
turned on. Use this report to iden-  
tify lost messages.  
B Press [Delete].  
Note  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❒ To delete another message,  
repeat from step A.  
❒ To cancel a deletion, press  
[Do not Delete]. The display re-  
turns to that of step A.  
E Press [Exit].  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
The standby display appears.  
D Press [Store / Change / Delete Auto  
Document].  
Storing, Changing, and  
Deleting an Auto Document  
9
E Select and follow the appropriate  
procedure depending on what  
you want to perform.  
If you often have to send a particular  
page to people (for example, a map, a  
standard attachment, or a set of in-  
structions), you can store that page in  
memory as an Auto Document. This  
saves rescanning the original every  
time you want to send it.  
Use the following procedure to pro-  
gram a new Auto Document or over-  
write an existing one.  
You can store the following items in  
an Auto Document:  
Note  
❒ If there are stored files, the file  
names are shown.  
• Originals (6 documents maximum,  
only one page per file).  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
F Place the original, and then select  
Storing a file  
any scan settings you require.  
A Check [Program / Change] is se-  
lected.  
B Select [*Not Stored].  
C
Enter a file name, and then press  
[OK].  
Reference  
“Entering Text”,General Set-  
tings Guide  
Note  
❒ You can also specify a scan size.  
See p.15 “Setting a Scan Area”,  
Facsimile Reference <Basic Fea-  
tures>.  
Changing a file  
A Check [Program / Change] is se-  
lected.  
B Select the file you want to  
G Press the {Start} key.  
change.  
The machine starts to scan and  
completes scanning.  
The “A file is already  
stored.If another file is  
storedone will be deleted.  
Is it OK?” message is shown.  
Note  
❒ To cancel scanning, press [Stop  
Scanning].  
C Press [Store].  
If you want to cancel storing,  
press [Do not Store].  
H Press [Exit].  
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Changing only a file name  
The standby display appears.  
A Press [Change Name].  
9
Deleting an Auto Document  
B Select the file whose name you  
want to change.  
Note  
C Enter a file name, and then  
❒ You cannot delete an Auto Docu-  
ment waiting to be transmitted.  
Delete it after the transmission or  
cancel the transmission, and then  
delete the Auto Document.  
press [OK].  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
Proceed to step  
.
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
H
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Note  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
❒ You can program up to two sizes.  
D Press [Store / Change / Delete Auto  
❒ You can specify a horizontal length  
from 128 to 1,200mm, or from 5.5  
to 47 inches.  
Document].  
E Press [Delete], and then select the  
file you want to delete.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
F Press [Delete].  
D Press [Program / Change / Delete Scan  
Note  
Size].  
❒ To cancel deleting, press [Do not  
Delete]. The display returns to  
E Select [Program Size 1] or [Program  
Size 2].  
that of step  
.
E
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Programming, Changing and  
Deleting a Scan Size  
9
F Enter a horizontal size using the  
When you select a scan size to scan a  
non-standard size original, two cus-  
tom sizes are available (Program Size  
1 and Program Size 2). Use these func-  
tions to program a custom size in ad-  
vance.  
number keys.  
To change an existing scan size, just  
use the same procedure.  
Important  
❒ When programming or changing a  
scan size, we recommend you  
make a record of the new size.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
Note  
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❒ Each time you press [mm] or  
[inch], the units switch between  
“mm” and “inch”. If you enter a  
length and change the units by  
pressing [mm] or [inch], the  
length is converted automati-  
cally according to the unit (frac-  
tions are rounded off). For  
example, when you enter {2},  
{2}, and {0} in millimeters and  
change to “inch”, the length “8.7  
inch” is shown on the display. If  
you press [mm] or [inch] again,  
“221mm” is displayed.  
The standby display appears.  
Deleting a scan size  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key,  
and then try again.  
D Press [Program / Change / Delete Scan  
Size].  
❒ To cancel a scan size, press [Can-  
cel].  
E Press [Delete], and then select [Pro-  
gram Size 1] or [Program Size 2].  
G Select a vertical size, and then  
press [OK].  
9
F Press [Yes].  
Note  
Note  
❒ A displayed vertical size differs  
depending on the selected unit.  
When [mm] is selected, [Auto De-  
tect], [210 mm (A4)], [257 mm(B4  
JIS)], [297 mm (A3)], [216 mm (8  
1/2)], and [279 mm (11)] are  
shown. When [inch] is selected,  
[Auto Detect], [8.3 inch (A4)],  
[10.1inch(B4 JIS)], [11.7 inch (A3)],  
[8.5 inch], and [11.0 inch] are  
shown.  
❒ To cancel deleting, press [No].  
The display returns to that of  
step  
.
E
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
❒ To cancel a scan size, press [Can-  
cel].  
H Press [Exit].  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Printing Journal  
Forwarding  
The Journal allows you to check a  
maximum of the last 50 communica-  
tions (receptions & transmissions)  
performed by the machine. You can  
print the Journal using the Informa-  
tion menu. See p.27 “Printing the  
Journal”.  
This function allows you to have mes-  
sages printed on the machine, and  
sent to a specified End Receiver.  
This is useful if, for example, you are  
visiting another office and would like  
a copy of your messages to be sent to  
that office.  
You can also specify a “folder” as the  
forwarding destination.  
Counters  
Preparation  
This function allows you to check the  
total number of pages transmitted  
and received on the display.  
To use this function, set Forward-  
ing under Reception Settings to On  
(enable). See p.147 “Reception Set-  
tings”.  
• Transmissions:  
Total number of transmitted pages  
Limitation  
• Receptions:  
Total number of received pages  
❒ The Forwarding function does not  
forward messages received with  
Confidential Reception, Memory  
Lock, Polling Reception mode, or  
messages received by Transfer Re-  
quest.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❒ You can select end receivers only  
from among destinations pro-  
grammed in the Address Book.  
You cannot specify programmed  
transfer stations as end receivers.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Transmission Page Count].  
9
Note  
❒ A fax number, e-mail address, IP-  
Fax destination, and folder can be  
set as the forwarding destination.  
❒ Even when [On] is selected for  
“Forwarding” in “Reception Set-  
tings”, if [Off] is selected for the for-  
warding destination in this  
function, only printing is per-  
formed, not forwarding. See p.147  
“Reception Settings”.  
E After checking the display, press  
[Exit].  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
❒ When you wish to change the end  
receivers depending on the for-  
warding destinations, specify the  
end receivers by the forwarding  
destinations, at “Special Senders”.  
A document received from a for-  
warding destination who has not  
been specified as the end receiver  
will be forwarded to the forward-  
ing destination that has been spec-  
ified in this function. See p.171  
“Special Senders to Treat Differ-  
ently”  
Programming an End Receiver  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Forwarding].  
E Press [On].  
❒ You can specify whether or not to  
print forwarded messages. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
11, bit 6).  
❒ Deleting a destination specified as  
a forward destination from the  
destination table causes the set-  
tings of the forward destination to  
be deleted, so they must be regis-  
tered again. When a destination is  
changed, a message is transmitted  
to the new destination. If there is  
no destination of the specified  
type, you can set to have a certain  
destination quoted with priority.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 32, bit 0).  
Limitation  
❒ One end receiver can be regis-  
tered per a special sender. To  
register two or more end receiv-  
ers, use Group Destination.  
However, a maximum of 500  
parties can be specified in a  
group.  
9
❒ You can program one of the Quick  
Operation keys with operations for  
this function. See p.144 “General  
Settings/Adjustment”.  
Note  
❒ If you have specified a folder for  
forwarding, you can specify the  
file format used for forwarding.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 21, bit 3).  
❒ If there is an End Receiver al-  
ready programmed, a receiver  
name is shown. If you want to  
change the receiver, press [Re-  
ceiver] and proceed to step  
.
F
❒ To cancel Forwarding, press  
[Cancel] and proceed to step  
.
H
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
F Specify an End Receiver using the  
destination list, and then press  
[OK].  
Quitting the forwarding function  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Forwarding].  
The receiver name is shown to the  
right of [Receiver].  
Note  
E Press [Off], and then press [OK].  
❒ Press the button on the right of  
the display to switch the desti-  
nation between fax number, e-  
mail address, IP-Fax destina-  
tion, and folder.  
❒
Set a folder destination in System  
Initial Setting/Administrator  
Setting/Register/Change/De-  
lete Address Book. “Registering  
Folders”, General Settings Guide.  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❒ If you have specified a folder for  
forwarding, you can specify the  
file format used for forwarding.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 21, bit 3).  
The standby display appears.  
Forwarding Mark  
9
You can print a Forwarding Mark on  
the receiver's messages that have  
been forwarded.  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key be-  
fore pressing [OK], and then try  
again.  
The receiver can distinguish between  
forwarded messages and usual recep-  
tions.  
G Press [OK].  
Note  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❒ You can specify whether or not to  
print a Forwarding Mark in the  
User Parameters. See p.166 “User  
Parameters” (switch 02, bit 0).  
The standby display appears.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
❒ This function is not available when  
memory forwarding is performed  
to a folder destination.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Memory Lock RX].  
E Select [On] or [Off], and then press  
[OK].  
Memory Lock  
When you switch Memory Lock on,  
received messages are stored in mem-  
ory and not printed automatically.  
When a message is received in the  
Memory Lock mode, the Confidential  
File (i) indicator blinks. To print this  
message, enter the Memory Lock ID.  
A user without the ID cannot print  
the message. This prevents unautho-  
rized users from seeing the message.  
Note  
❒ To cancel this setting, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
Preparation  
that of step  
.
D
To use Memory Lock, program the  
Memory Lock ID, and then switch  
Memory Lock on. See p.192 “Pro-  
gramming a Memory Lock ID”.  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
9
The standby display appears.  
Limitation  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax.  
ECM (Error Correction Mode)  
If part of a transmission fails because  
of a line problem, the lost data is auto-  
matically resent. For this function to  
work, the other machine must have  
ECM. You can turn this function on or  
off through the following procedure.  
Note  
❒
To store incoming documents from  
Special Senders only in Memory  
Lock, program each sender with  
“Special Senders to Treat Differ-  
ently”. See p.171 “Special Senders  
to Treat Differently”.  
Limitation  
❒ This function is not available with  
Internet Fax.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Note  
E Select [On] or [Off], and then press  
[OK].  
❒ If you turn ECM off, you cannot  
use the following functions:  
• JBIG Transmission  
• Super G3 Communication  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Note  
❒ To cancel this setting, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [ECM].  
that of step  
.
D
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
User Parameters  
User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs.  
To change function settings, set the User Parameter Switches.  
❖ Switches and Bits  
Each User Parameter has a set of switches, and each of the switches consist of  
eight bits, whose values are “0”or “1”. The right most bit is bit 0 and the left  
most is bit 7. You can adjust the settings to match your needs by switching the  
value of bits between “0”and“1”.  
9
Switch  
02  
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
↓
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
❖ User Parameter List  
User Parameter Switches are outlined below.  
Switch  
Bit  
0
Item  
Forwarding Mark  
TSI Print  
0
1
02  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
3
03  
0
Automatic printing of the Com-  
munication Result Report  
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
Automatic printing of the  
Memory Storage Report  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Automatic printing of the Poll-  
ing Reserve Report  
Automatic printing of the Poll-  
ing Result Report  
Automatic printing of the Im-  
mediate TX Result Report  
Automatic printing of the Poll-  
ing Transmission Clear Report  
Automatic printing of the  
Journal  
04  
Automatic printing of the  
Confidential File Report  
Automatic printing of Com-  
munication Failure Report  
and Transfer Result Report  
4
5
Indicates the parties  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Include sender's name on re-  
ports  
9
7
Include a portion of the image  
on reports  
Off  
On  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Switch  
Bit  
Item  
0
1
05  
0
Receive Service Call (SC)  
Condition (Substitute Recep- (Substitute RX)  
tion during service call)  
Possible  
Not possible  
(Reception off)  
2, 1 Substitute the reception when the machine cannot print (because all pa-  
per trays have run out of paper, toner is empty, or all paper trays are out  
of order)  
00: Enabled unconditionally (Free)  
01: Enabled when Own Name/Own Fax Number is received  
10: Enabled for Polling ID match  
11: Disabled (Reception off)  
5
7
Print sheet is limited to that  
which has highest priority.  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Empty tray alert (Paper Emp-  
ty Warning) even when one  
paper tray is empty  
06  
07  
08  
6
2
2
First page scanned for book  
originals  
From the left page From the right  
page  
Parallel Memory Transmis-  
sion  
Off  
On  
Authorized Reception Type  
Receiving from  
only specified  
senders  
Receiving all mes-  
sages except those  
from specified  
senders  
10  
11  
1
3
5
6
7
Combine two originals  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
On  
Pagereduction when printing  
Reception file setting  
Local print when forwarding  
9
Polling file after sending  
(Pollingtransmissionstandby  
time)  
Delete (Use Once) Standby (Save)  
14  
0
1
Print documents received  
with Auto Power-On Recep- ing (On)  
tion (Night Printing mode)  
Immediate print-  
When turning on  
the operation  
switch (Off)  
Long Document Transmis-  
sion (Well Log)  
Off  
On  
2
3
7
Batch Transmission  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Reset when function changed  
System Parameter List Trans-  
mission  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
Switch  
Bit  
Item  
0
1
17  
2
Whether you need to press  
[Add] after entering a Quick  
Dial/Group Dial when  
broadcasting  
Not necessary  
Necessary  
7
Receive messages by pressing Off (The machine  
On (The machine  
receives messages  
by pressing the  
{Start} key.)  
the {Start} key when originals  
does not receive  
messages by press-  
ing the {Start}  
key.)  
are not set.  
18  
0
1
Print date with Fax Header  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Print transmitter origin with  
Fax Header  
2
3
0
Print file number with Fax  
Header  
Off  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
Print page number with Fax  
Header  
19  
20  
Use paper delivery shift func-  
tion (Offset Print)  
1
0
Sort Journal by line type  
Off  
Off  
On  
On  
Automatic printing of the  
LAN-Fax Result Report.  
5, 4, 3, Reprinting time of stored documents in memory that could not be print-  
2
ed using LAN-Fax Driver  
0000: 0 minute / 0001: 1 minute / 0010: 2 minutes / 0011: 3 minutes /  
0100: 4 minutes / 0101: 5 minutes / 0110: 6 minutes / 0111: 7 minutes /  
1000: 8 minutes / 1001: 9 minutes / 1010: 10 minutes / 1011: 11 minutes  
/ 1100: 12 minutes / 1101: 13 minutes / 1110: 14 minutes / 1111: 15 min-  
utes  
9
21  
0
Print results of sending Re-  
ception Notice Request mes-  
sage  
Off  
On  
(print only when  
an error occurs)  
1
3
Respond to e-mail reception  
acknowledgment request  
Off  
On  
File format for forwarded  
folders  
TIFF  
PDF  
4
6
7
Transmit Journal by E-mail  
Not display Network error  
Off  
Display (Off)  
On  
On  
Not display (On)  
Off  
Transmit Error Mail Notifica-  
tion  
24  
25  
1, 0 Store a message in memory that could not be transmitted  
00: Off, 01: Store for 24 hours, 11: Store for 72 hours  
2
Fax or telephone in Auto  
Switch mode  
Fax  
Telephone  
4
RDS  
Off  
On  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Switch  
Bit  
Item  
0
1
32  
0
Quotation Priority for a desti- PaperOutput Priority Electronic Output  
nation when there is no desti-  
nation of the specified type.  
<Priority Order>  
Priority  
<Priority Order>  
1. IP-Fax destina-  
tion  
1. E-mail address  
2. Folder  
2. Fax number  
3. E-mail address 3. IP-Fax destination  
4. Folder  
Off  
4. Fax number  
On  
34  
0
1
Use gatekeeper server with  
IP-Fax  
Use SIP server with IP-Fax  
Off  
On  
E
Select the switch number you want  
to change.  
Changing the User Parameters  
Preparation  
Access to some User Parameter  
Settings requires installation of op-  
tional equipment, or that other set-  
tings be made beforehand.  
Important  
❒
We recommend you print and keep  
a User Parameter list when you  
program or change a User Parame-  
ter. See p.171 “Printing the User  
Parameter List”.  
F Select the bit number you want to  
change.  
❒ Do not change any bit switches  
other than those shown on the pre-  
vious pages.  
9
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
When the bit number is pressed,  
the current value switches be-  
tween 1 and 0.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Parameter Setting].  
Note  
❒ Repeat from step  
to change  
F
another bit number for the same  
switch.  
G Press [OK].  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
                        
Using Administrator Settings  
Note  
Special Senders to Treat  
Differently  
❒ To cancel these settings, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
that of step  
.
E
By programming particular receivers  
in advance, you can set the following  
function for each receiver:  
H Repeat steps  
and  
to change  
E
G
the switch settings.  
• Authorized RX  
• Forwarding  
I After all the settings are finished,  
press [Exit].  
• Reception File Print Qty  
• Print 2 Sided  
J Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
• Memory Lock  
• RX Reverse Printing  
• Paper Tray  
Printing the User Parameter List  
Print this list to see the current User  
Parameter settings. However, only  
items of importance or often-used  
items are included in the list.  
Use the Own Name or Own Fax  
Number to program your receivers. If  
the receiver has a machine of the  
same manufacturer, program an Own  
Name that has already been pro-  
grammed as a receiver. If the machine  
is not of the same manufacturer, use  
Own Fax Number. You can apply the  
same settings to all programmed  
numbers. You can then customize the  
settings for individual numbers as  
necessary using the Special Sender  
Registration function.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
The following items can be pro-  
grammed.  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
9
D Press [Print List] next to “Parameter  
• Special Senders (Up to 30. A maxi-  
mum of 20 characters for each  
name when using G3.)  
Setting”.  
Note  
• Full/Partial agreement  
❒ To cancel printing a list, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
When you program own names  
and facsimile names for multiple  
destinations, you can program a  
common sequence of characters to  
identify destinations using Partial  
agreement.  
that of step  
.
D
E Press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒ To cancel printing a list after  
pressing the {Start} key, press  
[Stop Printing]. The display re-  
turns to that of step  
.
D
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
• Memory Lock  
❖ Using Full matching  
• RX Reverse Printing  
Destination to be Number of pro-  
programmed  
(Own Name)  
grammed identifi-  
cations  
Note  
❒ You can program up to 24 charac-  
NEW YORK  
BRANCH  
3
ters for the sender.  
❒ You can check Own Name and  
Own Fax Number using the Jour-  
nal. You can check programmed  
Special Senders using the specified  
sender list. See p.27 “Printing the  
Journal”. See p.180 “Printing the  
Special Sender List”.  
HONG KONG  
BRANCH  
SYDNEY  
BRANCH  
❖ Using Partial matching  
Destination to be Number of pro-  
programmed  
(Own Name)  
❒ To use Forwarding, Print 2 Sided,  
or Paper Tray with Internet Fax re-  
ception, program the sender's e-  
mail address.  
grammed identifi-  
cations  
BRANCH  
1
❒ If you select “Off” for the Special  
Sender function in “Initial Set Up”,  
the settings will be the same as the  
Reception Settings. See p.147 “Re-  
ception Settings”.  
Note  
❒ You can program up to 30 wild  
cards.  
❒ Spaces are ignored when identi-  
fications are compared.  
❒ You can use wild cards for the  
Authorized Reception  
following functions:  
Use this function to limit incoming  
senders. The machine only receives  
faxes from programmed Special  
Senders, and therefore, it helps you  
screen out unwanted messages, such  
as junk mail, and saves wasting fax  
paper.  
• See  
p.174  
“Program-  
ming/Changing Special  
Senders”.  
• See p.175 “Authorized RX  
9
(Authorized Reception)”.  
• See p.175 “Forwarding”.  
Limitation  
Note  
❒ You cannot program senders as  
Special Senders if they do not have  
Own Name or Own Fax Number  
programmed.  
❒ To use this function, program the  
Special Senders function, and then  
select “On” in “Authorized RX”  
with “Reception Settings”. See  
p.147 “Reception Settings”. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
08, bit 2).  
❒ The machine cannot differentiate  
between Polling Reception and  
Free Polling documents from Spe-  
cial Senders.  
❒
Without programming Special Send-  
ers, the Authorized RX function  
will not work, even if you select  
“On”.  
❒ You cannot use the following func-  
tions with Internet Fax receptions.  
• Authorized RX  
• Reception File Print Qty  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
❒ You can select to receive only from  
programmed senders or receive  
only from senders other than those  
programmed in User Parameters.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 08, bit 2).  
❒ Set folder destinations using the  
Address Book Management func-  
tion under System Settings. See  
“Registering Folders”, General Set-  
tings Guide.  
❒ If you have specified a folder for  
forwarding, you can specify the  
file format used for forwarding.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 21, bit 3).  
❒ If you select “Off” for “Authorized  
RX” in “Initial Set Up”, the settings  
will be the same as the Reception  
Mode settings. See p.147 “Recep-  
tion Settings”.  
❒ You can change Special Senders in  
the same way as you program  
them.  
Reception File Print Quantity  
Use this function to print the speci-  
fied number of copies of documents  
received from programmed senders  
(Special Senders). If you do not pro-  
gram any Special Senders, the ma-  
chine prints the specified number of  
copies for all received documents.  
Forwarding  
Use this function to print received  
messages, and then transfer them to  
those receivers programmed before-  
hand.  
Limitation  
Folder destination can be registered.  
❒ You cannot use multi-copy print-  
ing with Polling Reception, Confi-  
dential Reception, or Memory  
Lock.  
It is also possible to forward faxes  
sent only by senders programmed as  
Special Senders.  
Note  
Note  
❒ You can specify up to 10 copies.  
❒ To use this function, program your  
Special Senders, and then select  
“On” for “Forwarding” in “Recep-  
tion Settings”. See p.147 “Recep-  
tion Settings”.  
Print 2 Sided  
9
Use this function to print on both  
sides of paper.  
❒ If you specify “On” in “Forward-  
ing” and select [Same as Basic Set-  
tings], the fax message will be  
forwarded to the other ends pro-  
grammed in “Specify End Receiv-  
er”. See p.162 “Forwarding”.  
Limitation  
❒ If you select the bypass tray for  
“Paper Tray”, duplex printing is  
disabled.  
❒ An external tray cannot be used as  
a destination for a two-sided-  
printed sheet.  
❒ If you do not program any Special  
Senders, the machine transfers all  
incoming documents to the other  
end specified in “Specify End Re-  
ceiver”.  
❒ You can set the fax destination, In-  
ternet fax destination, IP-Fax desti-  
nation or folder destination, as a  
forward destination.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
For example, if blue paper is in Tray 1  
and white paper is in Tray 2, the ma-  
chine prints the documents from Spe-  
cial Senders on the blue paper and  
prints the documents from other  
senders on the white paper, making it  
easy for you to separate the two.  
Memory Lock  
Use this function to store incoming  
documents from programmed send-  
ers (Special Senders) in memory with-  
out printing them. People without the  
Memory Lock ID cannot print the  
documents, and therefore this func-  
tion is useful for receiving confiden-  
tial documents. If you do not  
program any senders, the machine re-  
ceives fax message from all senders  
using Memory Lock reception.  
If you do not program any Special  
Senders, the machine outputs docu-  
ments received from all senders using  
the default paper tray.  
Limitation  
❒ For Polling Reception, you cannot  
select the paper tray.  
Preparation  
You must register Memory Lock  
ID in advance. See p.192 “Pro-  
gramming a Memory Lock ID”.  
Note  
❒ If the machine receives a message  
that has a different size from the  
paper in the specified tray, the ma-  
chine prints it after splitting it or  
minimizing its size. See p.100  
“Page Separation and Length Re-  
duction”.  
Reference  
p.192 “Programming a Memory  
Lock ID”  
Limitation  
❒ If you program the same sender in  
Memory Lock and Forwarding,  
Forwarding is disabled.  
❒ Selection of the bypass tray en-  
ables you to specify the paper size  
in “Scan Area”.  
Reception Reverse Printing  
Programming/Changing Special Senders  
Use this function to print the pages in  
reverse order. See p.100 “Reverse Or-  
der Printing”.  
9
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Paper Tray  
Use this function to print documents  
received from programmed senders  
(Special Senders) and the documents  
from other senders on different types  
of paper.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Program Special Sender].  
E
Check [Program / Change] is selected.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
Note  
F Select the destination to program  
or change.  
❒ You must select only the item  
you want to program.  
❒ To cancel these settings, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
that of step  
.
E
Authorized RX (Authorized  
Reception)  
A Select [Authorized RX].  
When programming a new Special  
B Press [On] or [Off], and then  
Sender, press [* Not Programed].  
press [OK].  
G
H
Enter a destination name, and then  
press [OK].  
Note  
❒ After you perform step , set  
K
Enter a destination name using  
Own Name or Own Fax Number.  
“Authorized RX” of “Recep-  
tion Settings” to “On”. See  
p.147 “Reception Settings”.  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
Forwarding  
Press [Full Agreement] or [Partial Agree-  
ment].  
A Select [Forwarding].  
B Select [On] or [Off].  
9
I Select the item you want to pro-  
If you select [Off], proceed to  
step D.  
gram.  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-  
tings] will result in the same  
setting made for “Forward-  
ing” under “Administrator  
Tools”. See p.162 “Forward-  
ing”.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
C Press the destination key of a  
forward destination, and then  
press [OK].  
❒
Deleting a destination speci-  
fied as a forward destination  
from the destination table  
causes the settings of the for-  
ward destination to be delet-  
ed, so they must be registered  
again. When a destination is  
changed, a message is trans-  
mitted to the new destina-  
tion. If there is no destination  
of the specified type, you can  
set a certain destination to be  
priority quoted. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch  
32, bit 0).  
Limitation  
❒ One forward destination can  
be registered for a destina-  
tion. To register two or more  
forward destinations, use  
Group Destinations. Howev-  
er a maximum of 500 parties  
can be specified in a group.  
D Press [OK].  
E Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ After you perform step , set  
K
“Forwarding” of “Reception  
Settings” to “On”. See p.147  
“Reception Settings”.  
Note  
❒ Press the button on the right  
of the display to switch the  
destination between fax  
number, e-mail address, IP-  
Fax destination, and folder.  
Reception File Print Qty  
A Select [Reception File Print Qty].  
❒ Set folder destinations using  
the Address Book Manage-  
ment function under System  
Settings. See “Registering  
Folders”, General Settings  
Guide.  
B Press [Number of Sets].  
9
❒ When a folder is specified as  
the forward destination, you  
can set a file format for for-  
warding. See p.166 “User Pa-  
rameters” (switch 21, bit 3).  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-  
tings] will result in the same  
setting made for “RX File  
Print Qty” of “Reception Set-  
tings”. See p.147 “Reception  
Settings”.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
C Enter the print quantity using  
the number keys, and then  
press [OK].  
RX Reverse Printing (Reception  
Reverse Printing)  
A Select [RX Reverse Printing].  
B Select [On] or [Off], and then  
press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-  
tings] will result in the same  
setting made for “RX Reverse  
Printing” of “Reception Set-  
tings”. See p.147 “Reception  
Settings”.  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
Paper Tray  
A Select [Paper Tray].  
Print 2 Sided  
B Select the tray you want to use,  
and then press [OK].  
A Select [Print 2 Sided].  
Note  
B Select [On] or [Off], and then  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-  
tings] will result in the same  
setting made for “Paper  
Tray” of ”Reception Set-  
tings”. See p.147 “Reception  
Settings”.  
press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-  
tings] will result in the same  
setting made for “2 Sided  
Print” of “Reception Set-  
tings”. See p.147 “Reception  
Settings”.  
J Press [OK].  
9
A Special Sender has been pro-  
grammed.  
Memory Lock  
Note  
❒ To program another sender, re-  
A Select [Memory Lock].  
peat the procedure from step  
.
F
B Select [On] or [Off], and then  
press [OK].  
K Press [Exit].  
Note  
L Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❒ Selecting [Same as Basic Set-  
tings] will result in the same  
setting made for “Program  
Memory Lock ID” under  
“Administrator Tools”. See  
p.165 “Memory Lock”.  
The standby display appears.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Programming Initial Set Up of a Special  
Sender  
Programming Authorized RX and  
Special RX Function  
Use this function to program “Initial  
Set Up” of a Special Sender. You can  
also specify the Bypass Tray Paper  
Size.  
A Select [Authorized RX] or [Special  
RX Function].  
B Select [On] or [Off], and then  
press [OK].  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Program Special Sender].  
E Press [Initial Set Up].  
The illustration shows the “Au-  
thorized RX” display as an ex-  
ample.  
Programming Bypass Tray Paper  
Size  
A Press [Bypass Tray Paper Size].  
You can select a size from [Auto  
Detect], [Standard Size], or [Cus-  
tom Size].  
If you select [Auto Detect], pro-  
ceed to steps B and G.  
9
If you select [Standard Size], pro-  
ceed to steps B, C, and G.  
F Select the function you want to  
program.  
If you select [Custom Size], pro-  
ceed to steps B , and D to G.  
B Select the size you want to pro-  
gram.  
Note  
❒
In this feature, “Authorized RX”  
has the same settings as “Recep-  
tion Settings”. See p.147 “Re-  
ception Settings”.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
❒ Each time you press [mm] or  
[inch], the units switch be-  
tween “mm” and “inch”. If  
you enter a length and  
change the units by pressing  
[mm] or [inch], it is converted  
automatically (fractions are  
rounded off).  
Note  
❒ If you select [Auto Detect], the  
machine recognizes the pa-  
per size automatically.  
• The machine will detect  
the paper size for the by-  
pass tray as the short edge  
of the paper is inserted  
into the machine. Even if  
you placed an A4 size  
sheet in theK orientation,  
the machine will detect it  
as A3L.  
F Enter the horizontal size of the  
paper using the number keys,  
and then press [#].  
❒ If you select [Standard Size],  
select a paper size displayed,  
and then proceed to step G.  
❒ If you select [Custom Size],  
proceed to step D.  
C Select the size you want to pro-  
gram from the sizes shown.  
Note  
❒ You can specify a horizontal  
size from 148mm (5.9 inch) to  
600mm (23.7 inch). You can-  
not enter a size smaller than  
1 4 8 m m o r l a r g e r t h a n  
600mm.  
D Make sure that [Vertical] is se-  
lected.  
E Enter the vertical size of the pa-  
per using the number keys,  
and then press [#].  
❒ Each time you press [mm] or  
[inch], the units switch be-  
tween “mm” and “inch”. If  
you enter a length and  
change the units by pressing  
[mm] or [inch], it is converted  
automatically (fractions are  
rounded off).  
9
G Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ You can specify a vertical  
size from 210mm (8.3 inch) to  
305mm (12.0 inch). You can-  
not enter a size smaller than  
210mm or larger than  
305mm.  
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
D Press [Print List] next to “Program  
Deleting a Special Sender  
Special Sender”.  
Use this function to program “Initial  
Set Up” of a Special Sender. The By-  
pass Tray Paper Size can also be spec-  
ified.  
Note  
❒ To cancel printing, press [Can-  
cel]. The display returns to that  
of step  
.
D
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
E Press the {Start} key.  
Note  
❒
To cancel printing after press-  
ing the {Start} key, press [Stop  
Printing]. The display returns to  
that of step  
.
D
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Program Special Sender].  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Box Settings  
E Press [Delete], and then select the  
Special Sender you want to de-  
lete.  
The following functions are for deliv-  
ery and transfer of messages:  
F Press [Delete].  
• Personal Box  
• Information Box  
• Transfer Box  
Note  
❒ To cancel deleting a special  
sender, press [Do not Delete]. The  
Reference  
display returns to that of step  
.
E
For details about how to set up  
these functions:  
G Press [Exit].  
9
• p.181 “Programming/chang-  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
ing Personal Boxes”  
The standby display appears.  
• p.184 “Programming/chang-  
ing Information Boxes”  
Printing the Special Sender List  
• p.186 “Programming/chang-  
ing Transfer Boxes”  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
For details about how to print out  
and delete messages stored in box-  
es:  
• p.40 “Personal Boxes”  
• p.42 “Information Boxes”  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
Limitation  
Note  
❒ You cannot set the same Box code  
on two different boxes.  
❒ You can specify a fax number, In-  
ternet Fax destination and IP-Fax  
destination as the transmission  
destination.  
❒
Transmission or programming may  
not be allowed if there is not  
enough free memory left. The  
amount of free memory left differs  
depending on the optional equip-  
ment installed.  
❒ The contents of the Personal Box  
will be saved until printing is com-  
pleted.  
❒ The Fax Header is not printed on  
delivered messages.  
Note  
❒ If a message cannot be delivered, a  
Communication Failure Report is  
printed and the message is saved  
as a Confidential Reception docu-  
ment.  
❒ The combined total of items that  
can be stored using the Personal  
Box, Information Box, and Trans-  
fer Box functions is 150.  
❒ You can edit boxes in the same  
way you program them. However,  
to change the SUB Code itself, you  
must delete the box, and then pro-  
gram a new SUB Code.  
Programming/changing Personal Boxes  
This section describes how to pro-  
gram Personal Boxes.  
You can store the following items:  
❒ If a destination in the destination  
table is deleted after being regis-  
tered, delivery is not performed  
and the settings of the delivery  
destination are also deleted. Also,  
when a delivery destination is  
changed, a message is sent to the  
changed destination. If there is no  
destination of the specified type,  
you can set a certain destination to  
be priority quoted. See p.166 “User  
Parameters” (switch 32, bit 0).  
• Box name (required)  
Up to 20 characters long  
• SUB Code (required)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
• Password (optional)  
9
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
Reference  
Note  
p.40 “Personal Boxes”  
❒ When programming  
a
pass-  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
word, a mark is displayed be-  
fore the Box name.  
• Receiver (optional)  
You can program one delivery des-  
tination for each Personal Box.  
Specify a delivery destination pro-  
grammed in Quick Dial.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Box Setting].  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
E Check that [Program / Change] is se-  
J Specify the settings you require.  
lected.  
If you do not want to program a  
password or receiver, proceed to  
F Select a box to program.  
step  
.
K
When programming a new box,  
press [* Not Programed].  
Programming a password  
A Press [Password].  
B Enter a password, and then  
press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To change a box already pro-  
grammed, press it and proceed  
to step  
.
I
Note  
G Press [Personal Box].  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
H Enter a box name, and then press  
[OK].  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
C Re-enter the password, and  
then press [OK].  
I Enter a SUB Code.  
9
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
Note  
❒ To change the SUB Code, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key,  
and then try again. To change a  
Box name, press [Box Name], and  
then repeat the procedure from  
❒ To change the password after  
pressing [OK], press [Change]  
and repeat steps B and C, or  
press [Cancel] and repeat the  
procedure from step A.  
step  
.
H
D Press [OK].  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
Programming an End Receiver  
D Press [Box Setting].  
A Press [Receiver].  
B Select a destination using the  
Quick Dial Table, and then  
press [OK].  
E Press [Delete], and then select the  
box you want to delete.  
With a programmed password  
Note  
❒ Press the button shown on  
the right side of the screen to  
switch the destination  
among fax number, Internet  
Fax address and IP-Fax ad-  
dress.  
A Enter a password using the  
number keys, and then press  
[OK].  
K Press [OK].  
L Press [Exit].  
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
9
Deleting Personal Boxes  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.  
This section describes how to delete  
Personal Boxes.  
F Press [Delete].  
Limitation  
Note  
❒
If messages have been programmed  
in the box, you cannot delete the  
box.  
❒ To cancel deleting a box, press  
[Do not Delete]. The display re-  
turns to that of step  
.
E
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Programming/changing Information  
Boxes  
This section describes how to set up  
an Information Box.  
You can store the following items:  
• Box name (required)  
Up to 20 characters long  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Box Setting].  
• SEP Code (required)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
E
Check that [Program / Change] is se-  
lected.  
• Password (optional)  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
F Select the box to program.  
When programming a new box,  
press [* Not Programed].  
When programming a password, a  
mark is displayed before the Box  
name.  
Note  
❒ You can edit boxes in the same  
way you program them. However,  
to change the SEP Code itself, you  
must delete the box, and then pro-  
gram a new SEP Code.  
Note  
❒ To change a box already pro-  
❒ If a destination in the destination  
table is deleted after being regis-  
tered, delivery is not performed  
and the settings of the delivery  
destination are also deleted. Also,  
when a delivery destination is  
changed, a message is sent to the  
changed destination. If there is no  
destination of the specified type,  
you can set a certain destination to  
be priority quoted. See p.166 “User  
Parameters” (switch 32, bit 0).  
9
grammed, press it, and then  
proceed to step . If a password  
I
has been programmed, enter  
the password, press [OK], and  
then proceed to step  
.
I
G Press [Information Box].  
H Enter a box name, and then press  
[OK].  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
Reference  
p.42 “Information Boxes”  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
I Enter the SEP Code.  
L Re-enter the password, and then  
press [OK].  
Note  
Note  
❒ To change the SEP Code, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key,  
and then try again. To change  
the box name, press [Box Name],  
and then repeat the procedure  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key be-  
fore pressing [OK], and then try  
again.  
from step  
.
H
❒ To change the password after  
pressing [OK], press [Change]  
and repeat steps and , or  
J Press [Password].  
K
L
press [Cancel] and repeat the  
procedure from step  
Note  
.
J
❒ If you do not want to program a  
password, proceed to step  
.
N
M Press [OK].  
K Enter a password, and then press  
N Press [OK].  
[OK].  
O Press [Exit].  
P Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
9
Deleting Information Boxes  
This section describes how to delete  
Information Boxes.  
Note  
Limitation  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key be-  
fore pressing [OK], and then try  
again.  
❒
If messages have been programmed  
in the box, you cannot delete the  
box.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Box Setting].  
Programming/changing Transfer Boxes  
This function turns your machine into  
a fax relay station. Documents sent  
with a SUB Code that matches the  
SUB Code programmed as a Transfer  
Box are received, and then relayed to  
a programmed receiver.  
E Press [Delete], and then select the  
box you want to delete.  
Since documents can be sent to multi-  
ple destinations in a single transfer re-  
quest, you can economize on call  
charges when sending to remote des-  
tinations.  
With a programmed password  
A Enter a password using the  
number keys, and then press  
[OK].  
Note  
❒ Inform the Requesting Party of the  
SUB Code assigned to the Transfer  
Box. When they want to have a  
message transferred by your ma-  
chine, ask them to send the mes-  
sage  
using  
SUB  
Code  
9
Transmission and specifying this  
SUB Code. If a password has also  
been programmed, inform them of  
this too, and ask them to enter it as  
the SID code.  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.  
F Press [Delete].  
You can store the following items:  
Note  
• Box name (required)  
❒ To cancel deleting a box, press  
[Do not Delete]. The display re-  
Up to 20 characters  
• SUB Code (required)  
turns to that of step  
.
E
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
• Password (optional)  
❒ If you delete a destination speci-  
fied as a reception destination us-  
ing the destination table, the  
settings of the reception destina-  
tion are also deleted, so they must  
be registered again. When a desti-  
nation is changed, a message is  
transmitted to the new destination.  
If there is no destination of the  
specified type, you can set a certain  
destination to be priority quoted.  
See p.166 “User Parameters”  
(switch 32, bit 0).  
Up to 20 characters long and can be  
composed of digits 0-9, “#”, “*”,  
and spaces (the first character can-  
not be a space).  
Note  
❒
When programming a password,  
a mark is displayed in front of  
the Box name.  
• End Receiver (required)  
You can store five End Receivers  
(destinations to which messages  
will be forwarded) for each box.  
Specify End Receivers with Quick  
Dials or Groups assigned to Quick  
Dials that have been programmed  
beforehand.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Limitation  
❒ After messages are transferred,  
Transfer Result Reports are not  
sent back to the sender.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Box Setting].  
Note  
❒ You can specify the Internet fax  
destination and IP-Fax destination  
as a reception station.  
E
Check that Select [Program / Change]  
is selected.  
❒ After messages are transferred,  
they are deleted.  
F Select the box to program.  
❒ When this function is turned on,  
the machine prints out the re-  
ceived messages it transfers and a  
Transfer Result Report after the  
transfer has finished. If you want  
to turn this function off, please  
contact your service representa-  
tive.  
When programming a new box,  
press [* Not Programed].  
9
❒ When the programmed receiver is  
a Multi-step Transfer Group Dial,  
Multi-step Transfer takes place.  
For more information, contact  
your service representative.  
Note  
❒ To change a box already pro-  
grammed, press it, and then  
❒ You can edit boxes in the same  
way you program them.  
proceed to step  
.
I
G Press [Transfer Box].  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Note  
H Enter a Box name, and then press  
[OK].  
❒ You can change the display  
to the fax destination, Inter-  
net fax destination, and IP-  
Fax destination using the  
button on the right side of the  
display.  
Reference  
“Entering Text”, General Set-  
tings Guide  
I Enter a SUB Code.  
❒ A reception station can also  
be registered as a group des-  
tination. In such a case, a  
maximum of 500 parties in-  
cluding End Receivers 1-5  
can be specified in a group.  
To register another End Receiv-  
ers, repeat the procedure from  
step A.  
Note  
Programming a password  
❒ To change the SUB Code, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key,  
and then try again. To change  
Box name, press [Box Name], and  
If you do not want to program a  
password, proceed to step  
.
K
A Press [Password].  
then repeat from step  
.
H
B
Enter a password, and then press  
[OK].  
J Specify the condition of registra-  
tion.  
Programming End Receivers  
A Select an End Receiver.  
9
Note  
❒ You can store five End Re-  
ceivers.  
B Specify End Receivers with  
Quick Dials, and then press  
[OK].  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
C
Re-enter the password, and then  
press [OK].  
E Press [Delete], and then select the  
box you want to delete.  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key  
before pressing [OK], and  
then try again.  
With a programmed password  
A Enter a password using the  
number keys, and then press  
[OK].  
❒ To change the password after  
pressing [OK], press [Change]  
and repeat steps B and C, or  
press [Cancel] and repeat the  
procedure from step A.  
D Press [OK].  
K Press [OK].  
L Press [Exit].  
Note  
M Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
The standby display appears.  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.  
9
F Press [Delete].  
Deleting Transfer Boxes  
Note  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
❒
To cancel deleting a special send-  
er, press [Do not Delete]. The dis-  
play returns to that of step  
.
E
G Press [Exit].  
H Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Box Setting].  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Printing the Box List  
Transfer Report  
Follow the procedure below to print a  
list showing the currently pro-  
grammed Personal Boxes, Informa-  
tion Boxes, and Transfer Boxes.  
For the Requesting Party to be able to  
receive Transfer Result Reports from  
the Transfer Station, the Requesting  
Party must program the number of  
the telephone line in connection on  
their own machine. See p.52 “Trans-  
fer Request”.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Be sure to insert a pause after the area  
code.  
For example, if you are in the United  
States and your fax number is 212-  
1234567, program the following:  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
• 1212-1234567  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
You can program the fax number for  
the G3 line.  
D Press [Print List] next to “Box Set-  
ting”.  
Limitation  
E Press the {Start} key.  
❒
You cannot program or edit a Trans-  
fer Report when using a line (dur-  
ing communication). Program or  
edit after communication.  
After printing the list, you can then  
start from step  
.
D
Note  
Note  
❒ To cancel printing a list before  
pressing the {Start} key, press  
[Cancel] or the {Clear/Stop} key.  
The display returns to that of  
❒ You cannot use Transfer Request if  
the telephone number of their ma-  
chine is not programmed into that  
machine.  
step  
.
D
9
❒ Up to 16 digits are available for G3.  
❒ To cancel printing a list after  
pressing the {Start} key, press  
[Stop Printing]. The display re-  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
turns to that of step  
.
D
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Transfer Report].  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
E Specify the fax number.  
Programming a Confidential ID  
Program a Confidential ID to print a  
Confidential Reception. See p.36  
“Printing a Confidential Message”.  
Note  
❒ If you do not program a Confiden-  
tial ID, you cannot receive a Confi-  
dential Transmission.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
Programming a G3 Fax Number  
A Press [G3 Fax No. (Dir.)].  
B Enter your facsimile number  
using the number keys, and  
then press [OK].  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Program Confidential ID].  
E
Enter an ID using the number keys,  
and then press [OK].  
Note  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key.  
9
F Press [Exit].  
G Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Note  
❒ A Confidential ID can be any  
four-digit number, except 0000.  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key be-  
fore pressing [OK], and then try  
again.  
To cancel programming an ID,  
press [Cancel]. The display returns  
to that of step  
.
D
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
Administrator Setting  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key be-  
fore pressing [OK], and then try  
again.  
Programming a Polling ID  
Program a Polling ID to use the  
Transfer Request, Transfer Station,  
Default ID Polling Transmission, and  
Default ID Polling Reception func-  
tions. When you use ID Transmission,  
program the same ID as the one pro-  
grammed on the sender's machine.  
❒ To cancel programming an ID,  
press [Cancel]. The display re-  
turns to that of step  
.
D
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Reference  
p.11 “Polling Transmission”  
Programming a Memory Lock ID  
p.14 “Polling Reception”  
Program a Memory Lock ID to be en-  
tered before printing documents  
when the Memory Lock function is  
activated.  
p.52 “Transfer Request”  
p.75 “Selecting transmission op-  
tions for a single transmission”  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Program Polling ID].  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Program Memory Lock ID].  
9
E
Enter an ID using the number keys  
and [A] to [F], and then press [OK].  
E
Enter an ID using the number keys,  
and then press [OK].  
Note  
Note  
❒ Register a four-digit number us-  
ing 0 through 9 and A through F  
(expect for 0000 and FFFF).  
❒ A Memory Lock ID can be any  
four-digit number, except 0000.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
❒ If you make a mistake, press  
[Clear] or the {Clear/Stop} key be-  
fore pressing [OK], and then try  
again.  
E Press [Push Button Phone] or [Dial  
Phone (10PPS)] to select the line,  
and then press [OK].  
❒ To cancel programming an ID,  
press [Cancel]. The display re-  
turns to that of step  
.
D
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Selecting Dial/Push Phone  
Reference  
Use this function to select a line type  
when the machine is connected to a  
G3 analog line.  
p.202 “Selecting the Line Type”  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Dial and Push lines are available for  
selection.  
Note  
Storing or Printing Received  
Documents  
❒ When the optional G3 expansion  
unit is installed, “G3-2” appears.  
Specify whether received documents  
are to be saved on the hard disk or  
printed immediately without being  
saved. You can print stored docu-  
ments repeatedly or download them  
as images to a computer using a Web  
Image Monitor or DeskTopBinder. If  
you select printing without saving,  
documents are printed each time they  
are received.  
❒ This function is not available in  
some areas.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
9
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Select Dial / Push Phone].  
Limitation  
❒ If using System Settings you have  
set the machine to distribute re-  
ceived faxes to the delivery server,  
the documents cannot be saved on  
the hard disk.  
Note  
❒ You can use “User Parameters”  
(switch 10, bit 5) to set whether or  
not to print stored received docu-  
ment. See p.166 “User Parame-  
ters”.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
❒ If the facsimile is set to store re-  
ceived documents, document re-  
ception can be notified to a  
specified e-mail address.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
D Press [Reception File Setting].  
❒ Documents saved on the hard disk  
are categorized as received and  
stored documents. For details  
about printing saved documents,  
see p.34 “Printing/Deleting Re-  
ceived and Stored Documents  
(Print/Delete Stored RX File)”.  
E Select [Print] or [Store], and then  
press [OK].  
❒ You cannot switch the setting if re-  
ceived documents have been  
stored on the hard disk. To switch  
the setting, print documents stored  
on the hard disk if necessary, and  
then delete them.  
Note  
❒
Received confidential messages are  
stored in memory. Use the Print  
Confidential RX File function to  
print them.  
❒ To cancel your selection, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
that of step  
.
D
❒
When [Store] is selected, you can  
select whether or not to send  
notice of reception to a specific  
e-mail address. To notify of re-  
ception, press [Notify Dest.] and  
select an e-mail address from  
the Internet Fax destinations  
programmed in the address  
book. Further, you can register a  
group destination. In such a  
case, a maximum of 500 parties  
can be specified in a group.  
❒ With [Store] selected, more memo-  
ry space will be used as the num-  
ber of saved documents increase.  
After memory space becomes in-  
sufficient, no more documents are  
saved on the hard disk. If this hap-  
pens, the machine will start print-  
ing and deleting saved documents  
with the oldest one.  
9
❒ You can store received documents  
up to a total of approximately 320  
pages or 2,240 (when the optional  
expansion memory is installed) of  
A4 size Standard <ITU-T#4Chart>.  
F Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
❒ You cannot send received docu-  
ments.  
Reception Report e-mail  
❒ You cannot manage documents  
stored on the Document Server  
display.  
When a received document is stored,  
this report is sent to the e-mail ad-  
dress set as the destination for notifi-  
cation.  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Administrator Settings  
C Press [Administrator Tools].  
Setting a User for Viewing  
Received and Stored  
Documents  
D Press [Stored RX File User Setting].  
E If you want to use a user code,  
press [On].  
The administrator can be specified for  
managing documents stored on the  
machine after fax messages are re-  
ceived. To specify the administrator,  
enter the administrator user code for  
managing documents using Web Im-  
age Monitor or DeskTopBinder  
Lite/Professional.  
Preparation  
You must register the administra-  
tor's User Code to the destination  
table in advance. See “Authentica-  
tion Information”, General Settings  
Guide  
Note  
❒ If you do not want to use a user  
code, press [Off] and proceed to  
step  
.
H
❒ To cancel the selection, press  
[Cancel]. The display returns to  
Note  
that of step  
.
D
❒
This function is only available when  
received documents are saved on  
the hard disk. See p.193 “Storing or  
Printing Received Documents”.  
F Press the destination key of the  
user you wish to specify, and then  
press [OK].  
❒ If the programmed user code has  
been deleted using the Address  
Book Management function under  
System Settings, you cannot view  
received and saved documents us-  
ing a Web Image Monitor. Select  
[Off] in step E or reprogram a user  
code.  
9
❒ If the specified user is deleted from  
the address book, a message “de-  
leted from address book” will ap-  
pear. Specify the user again from  
the start.  
G Check the selected user, and then  
press [OK].  
A Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
B Press [Facsimile Features].  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administrator Setting  
Note  
❒ When a programmed user is de-  
leted from the destination list, a  
message “Deleted from Ad-  
dress Book” is displayed. Re-en-  
ter the user.  
H Press [OK].  
I Press the {User Tools/Counter} key.  
The standby display appears.  
Menu Protection Settings  
You can set up user access rights for  
functions that users other than ad-  
ministrators can set. For details de-  
scription, ask the administrator.  
9
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Solving Operation Problems  
When an Error Report is Printed  
An Error Report is printed if a mes-  
sage cannot be successfully sent or re-  
ceived.  
Possible causes include a problem  
with your machine or noise on the  
telephone line. If an error occurs dur-  
ing transmission, resend the original.  
If an error occurs during reception,  
ask the sender to resend the message.  
Note  
❒ If an error happens frequently,  
contact your service representa-  
tive.  
❒ The “Page” column gives the total  
number of pages. The “Page Not  
Sent” column gives the number of  
pages not sent or received success-  
fully.  
❒ You can display a destination with  
the User Parameters. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 04, bit  
4).  
❒ You can display a sender name  
with the User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch  
04, bit 5).  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solving Operation Problems  
Turning Off the Main Power / When a  
Power Failure Occurs  
❒ Make sure that 100% is shown on  
R CAUTION:  
the display before you unplug the  
machine. If a lower value is shown,  
some data is currently present in  
memory.  
• When you disconnect the power  
plug from the wall outlet, always  
pull the plug (not the cable).  
Even if the main power switch is  
turned off, the contents of the ma-  
chine memory (for example, pro-  
grammed numbers) will not be lost.  
However, if power is lost for about  
one hour because the main power  
switch is turned off, there is a power  
cut, or the power cable is removed,  
contents of the Fax memory will be  
lost. Lost items will include any fax  
messages stored in memory using  
Memory Transmission/Reception,  
Auto Document, Confidential Recep-  
tion, Memory Lock, or Substitute Re-  
ception.  
❒ Right after a power failure, the in-  
ternal battery needs to be suffi-  
ciently recharged to guard against  
future data loss. Keep the machine  
plugged in and the main power  
switch on for about one week after  
the power loss.  
-
RDS (Remote Diagnostic System)  
If your machine has a problem, a ser-  
vice representative can perform vari-  
ous settings over the telephone line  
from the service station.  
If a file has been deleted from memo-  
ry, a Power Failure Report is auto-  
matically printed as soon as the  
power is restored. This report can be  
used to identify lost files. If a memory  
stored for Memory Transmission was  
lost, resend it. If a message received  
by Memory Reception or Substitute  
Reception was lost, ask the sender to  
resend it.  
If you want to use this function,  
change the User Parameter. See p.166  
“User Parameters” (switch 25, bit 4).  
10  
Important  
❒ Do not turn off the main power  
switch while the power indicator is  
lit or blinking. If you do, the hard  
disk and memory may be dam-  
aged and failure could result.  
❒ Turn off the main power switch be-  
fore pulling out the plug. If you  
pull out the plug with the switch  
on, the hard disk and memory may  
be damaged and failure could re-  
sult.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax  
When an Error Occurs Using Internet Fax  
Error Mail Notification  
The machine sends the Error Mail Notification to the sender when it is unable to  
successfully receive a particular e-mail message. A “cc” of this notification is also  
sent to the administrator's e-mail address when one is specified.  
Note  
❒ You can select to send Error Mail Notification with User Parameters. See  
p.166 “User Parameters” (switch 21, bit 7).  
❒ If Error Mail Notification cannot be sent, the Error Report (E-Mail) is printed  
by the machine.  
❒ If an error occurs when an e-mail is received via SMTP, the SMTP server  
sends an error e-mail to the originator of the message.  
Error Report (E-Mail)  
The Error Report (E-Mail) is printed by the machine when it is unable to send an  
Error Mail Notification.  
Server-Generated Error E-mail  
The transmitting server sends this error e-mail to the originator of e-mail that  
cannot be transmitted successfully (due to reasons such as specifying an incor-  
rect e-mail address).  
Note  
❒ After a server-generated error e-mail is printed, the first page of the sent doc-  
ument is printed.  
10  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Solving Operation Problems  
10  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Appendix  
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone  
Line and Telephone  
Connecting the Telephone Line  
To connect the machine to a telephone line, use a snap-in modular type connec-  
tor.  
Important  
❒ Make sure the connector is the correct type before you start.  
❖ Where to connect the machine  
AAG010S  
1. G3 interface unit connector  
2. External telephone connector  
3. Extra G3 interface unit connector  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Selecting the Line Type  
Select the line type to which the machine is connected. There are two types: tone  
and pulse dial.  
Note  
❒ This function is not available in some areas.  
Select the line type using “Administrator Settings”. See p.193 “Selecting Di-  
al/Push Phone”.  
Connecting the Optional Handset or an External Telephone  
You can connect the optional handset or an external telephone to the machine.  
You can use it for telephone calls.  
Note  
❒ Some external telephones may not be connected or may suffer reduced func-  
tionality.  
Limitation  
❒ When you use the optional handset or an external telephone with the {On  
Hook Dial} key for telephone calls, you can not talk with the other party with-  
out pressing the {On Hook Dial} key after taking off the receiver.  
❖ Specifying the handset line type  
TT  
DP  
ND1X00E0  
11  
The switch on the handset should be in the appropriate position-TT (Tone Di-  
aling) or DP (Pulse Dialing).  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telephone  
❖ Adjusting the handset bell volume  
TT  
DP  
ND1X00E0  
Adjust the handset ringer volume using the volume switch.  
11  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Optional Equipment  
Expansion Memory (32MB: DIMM)  
This allows you to send fax messages at high resolution (Super Fine). This also  
allows you to receive fax messages at high resolution (Fine or Super Fine). If you  
require this option, consult your service representative. See p.212 “Maximum  
Values”.  
Handset  
You can make or receive calls by installing the optional handset and dialing  
manually.  
Reference  
p.58 “Manual Dial”  
Extra G3 Interface Unit  
This option provides one extra G3 line connection.  
A maximum of two G3 interface unit can be installed.  
11  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
❖ Fax Transmission and Reception  
Standard  
G3  
Resolution  
G3:  
8 × 3.85/mm·200 × 100dpi (Standard character),  
8 × 7.7/mm·200 × 200dpi (Detail character),  
8 × 15.4/mm (Fine character: optional expansion  
memory required),  
16 × 15.4/mm·400 × 400dpi (Super Fine character:  
optional expansion memory required)  
Transmission time  
G3: 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution  
(JBIG transmission: 2 seconds)  
Data compression method  
Maximum original size  
Maximum scanning size  
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
Standard size: A3, 11" × 17"  
Standard size: 297 × 432mm/11" × 17"  
Irregular size: 297 × 1,200mm/11" × 47"  
Print process  
Printing on standard paper using a laser  
G3:  
Transmission speed  
33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,2  
00/16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/7,200/4,800/2,40  
0bps (auto shift down system)  
❖ Power Consumption  
Standby mode  
approx. 250 W  
approx. 140 W  
19 W or less  
Low power mode  
Sleep mode  
Immediate Transmission  
Memory Transmission  
Memory Reception  
Reception  
approx. 270 W  
approx. 260 W  
approx. 260 W  
approx. 760 W  
1,500 W or less  
11  
Maximum power consumption  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
❖ Internet Fax Transmission and Reception  
Network  
LAN : Local Area Network  
Ethernet/10Base-T, 100Base-TX, IEEE1394 (IP over 1394),  
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)  
Transmit function  
Scan line density  
E-mail  
200 × 100dpi (Standard character), 200 × 200dpi (Detail char-  
acter), 200 × 400dpi (Fine character: optional) *1 , 400 × 400dpi  
(Super Fine character: optional) *1  
A3 *1 , B4 *1 , A4  
Original size : Scanning width  
Communication Protocols  
•
Transmission  
SMTP, TCP/IP  
•
Reception  
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP  
E-mail format  
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion  
Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR *1 , MMR *1 compression)  
Authentication method  
Internet communication  
E-mail send functions  
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP  
Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail address  
Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format  
and e-mail transmission. Memory transmission only.  
E-mail receive functions  
Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH)  
files and ASCII text. Memory reception only.  
*1  
Full mode  
11  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
❖ IP-Fax Transmission and Reception  
Network  
LAN: Local Area Network  
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX, IEEE1394 (IP over 1394),  
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)  
Scan line density  
8 × 3.85mm·200 × 100dpi (Standard character),  
8 × 7.7mm, 200 × 200dpi (Detail character),  
8 × 15.4mm (Fine character: optional expansion memory required),  
16 × 15.4mm, 400 × 400dpi (Super Fine character: optional ex-  
pansion memory required)  
Original size  
Maximum A3 or 11" × 17" (DLT)  
Maximum scanning size  
Transmission protocol  
Compatible machines  
IP-Fax transmission function  
Standard: A3, 297mm × 432mm, Irregular: 297mm × 1200mm  
Recommended: T.38 Annex, TCP, UDP/IP communication  
IP-Fax compatible machines  
Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax  
through a network.  
Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to tele-  
phone lines via a VoIP gateway.  
IP-Fax reception function  
Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.  
Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected to tele-  
phone lines via a VoIP gateway.  
Compatible Machines  
This machine is compatible to machines having the following specifications.  
Communication protocols  
•
Transmission  
SMTP  
•
Reception  
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4  
E-mail format  
•
•
Format  
MINE, Base64  
Content-Type  
Image/tiff  
Multipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/tiff (attached file  
forms))  
11  
Data format  
•
•
Profile  
TIFF Profile S  
Coding  
MH, MR *1 , MMR *1  
•
•
Original size  
A3 *1 , A4, B4 *1 , 81/2"×11" *1 , 81/2"×14" *1  
Resolution (dpi)  
200×100/200×200, 204×98/204×196, 200×400 or 400×400  
*1  
Available in full mode, depending on the other party's settings.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Acceptable Types of Originals  
Make sure your originals are completely dry before setting them in the machine.  
Wet ink or correcting fluid from originals will mark the exposure glass and affect  
the resulting image.  
Acceptable original sizes  
Where original is set Acceptable original size  
Maximum  
number of  
sheets  
Paper thickness  
Exposure glass  
Up to A3 (297 × 420mm),  
11" × 17" (279 × 432mm)  
1
----  
40-128 g/m2  
ADF, one-sided  
document  
Fax transmission: A5 L to A3 80 sheets  
L (up to 1,200mm long)  
8" × 51/2" L to 11" × 17"L  
(80 g/m2, 20 lb) (11-34 lb)  
52-105 g/m2  
ADF, two-sided  
document  
Fax transmission: A5 L to A3 80 sheets  
L (up to 432mm long)  
8" × 51/2" L to 11" × 17"L  
(80 g/m2, 20 lb) (14-28 lb)  
Paper size and scanned area  
❖ Exposure Glass  
11  
❖ ADF  
AAG019S  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Limitation  
❒ There may be a difference in the size of the image when it is printed at the des-  
tination.  
❒ If you place an original larger than A3, 11"×17" on the exposure glass, only an  
A3, 11"×17" area is scanned.  
Note  
❒ Even if an original is correctly placed on the exposure glass or in the ADF, a  
margin of 3mm (0.1") around each edge of the original may not be sent.  
❒ If the receiver uses paper of a smaller width than the original, the image will  
be reduced to fit that paper. See p.74 “Auto Reduce”.  
❒ The machine detects paper sizes in the following ways:  
• When you place an original in the ADF, an original wider than about  
264mm (10.4") is scanned as A3, 11" × 17" size.  
An original narrower than about 230mm (9.1") will be sent as 81/2" × 11" or  
81/2" × 14" size, and an original narrower than about 264mm (10.4”) is  
scanned as B4 JIS.  
Originals up to 1,200mm (47.2") in length can be scanned.  
• Refer to the table below for sizes the machine can detect when you place  
an original on the exposure glass. Because the machine scans non-standard  
size documents in a standard size, part of the image may be truncated de-  
pending on the length of the document. For details about how to set non-  
standard size documents, see p.15 “Setting a Scan Area”, Facsimile Refer-  
ence <Basic Features>.  
❖ Metric Version  
Length *1  
–approx. 249mm approx.249mm– approx. 274mm– approx. 316mm–  
approx. 274mm approx. 316mm  
–approx.  
243mm  
×
B5 JISL  
A4L  
FL  
approx.  
243mm–  
approx.  
268mm  
B5 JISK  
B4 JISL  
B4 JISL  
B4 JISL  
11  
approx.  
A4K  
A3L  
A3L  
A3L  
268mm–  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
❖ Inch Version  
Length *1  
–approx. 9.8"  
approx. 9.8"– ap- approx. 10.8"–  
approx. 12.4"–  
FL  
prox. 10.8"  
approx. 12.4"  
81/2"×11"L  
–approx.  
9.6"  
×
×
11"×81/2"K  
approx.  
9.6" – ap-  
prox.  
11"×17"L  
11"×17"L  
11"×17"L  
10.6"  
11"×81/2"K  
approx.  
10.6"–  
11"×17"L  
11"×17"L  
11"×17"L  
× - Unable to auto detect  
*1  
Normally a length of about 420mm (16.5") can be scanned; however, it is only possi-  
ble to specify a scanning size up to 432mm (17").  
-Maximum scan area  
The maximum scan area is shown below:  
• Memory Transmission: 297 × 1,200mm/11" × 47" (W × L) from the ADF  
• Immediate Transmission: 297 × 1,200mm/11" × 47" (W × L) from the ADF  
Note  
❒ During Immediate Transmission, the length of the scanning range can be-  
come narrower than 1,200mm (47"), depending on the character size as  
well as the settings on the destination machine.  
• 297 × 432mm/11" × 17" (W × L) (from the exposure glass)  
Original sizes difficult to detect  
The machine has difficulty detecting the size of the following kinds of originals.  
(When this happens, the receiving machine may not select print paper of the cor-  
rect size.)  
11  
• documents placed on the exposure glass of sizes other than those listed in the  
table below  
• originals with index tabs, tags, or protruding parts  
• transparent originals, such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper  
• dark originals with dense text or drawings  
• originals that contain areas of solid print  
• originals that have solid print around their edges  
• originals with glossy surfaces  
• bound originals of more than 10mm (0.3") in thickness, such as books.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
The following paper sizes are automatically detected in facsimile mode.  
❖ Metric Version  
8 1/2"×13"  
(F4)  
Paper size  
where origi-  
nal is placed  
A3L  
B4 JIS L  
A4KL  
B5 JISKL A5KL  
Exposure  
glass  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
×
ADF  
b
b- Auto detect  
× - Unable to auto detect  
❖ Inch Version  
8 1/2"×14" L  
8 1/2"×11" KL  
5 1/2"×8 1/2" K  
Paper size where 11"×17"L  
original is placed  
Exposure glass  
ADF  
b
b
b
b
b
b
×
b
b- Auto detect  
× - Unable to auto detect  
11  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Maximum Values  
The following list contains the maximum value for each item.  
Note  
❒ The maximum number of pages that can be stored or transmitted may de-  
crease depending on the contents of documents.  
Item  
Standard  
Expansion memory (Optional)  
28 MB  
Memory (with optional)  
4 MB  
The number of pages that you can store in Approx. 320  
memory (Using A4 size Standard <ITU-T  
#4Chart> )  
Approx. 2,240  
Total number of all documents  
The number of pages per file  
The number of pages for all files  
400  
400  
1,000  
1,000  
1,000  
3,000  
500  
The number of destinations you can spec- 500  
ify for one file  
The number of destinations you can spec- 500  
ify for all files  
500  
The number of Quick Dials you can program 2,000  
The number of Group Dials you can program 100  
2,000  
100  
The number of destinations you can pro- 500  
gram in a group  
500  
The number of digits for Dials  
128  
128  
100  
6
The number of Programs you can register 100  
The number of Auto Documents you can  
program  
6
3
The number of Standard Message Stamps  
you can program  
3
The number of transmission records the 200  
machine can store  
200  
The number of stored documents you can 1,000  
specify at one time  
1,000  
11  
The number of stored documents you can 30  
send at one time  
30  
The number of pages that you can store in  
the Document Server (Using ITU-T #4Chart )  
Approx. 9,000  
Approx. 9,000  
1,000  
The number of pages you can store in the 1,000  
Document Server for one document  
*1  
This indicates the number of transmission records that you can check using Smart-  
DeviceMonitor for Admin. From the machine you can check up to 400 communica-  
tion records (transmission plus reception).  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
D
Default ID/Free Polling Reception, 14  
Default ID Transmission, 11, 12, 74  
Deleting  
180-Degree Rotation Printing, 98  
2 Sided Printing, 97  
Information Box Messages, 45  
programmed destinations, 119  
Destination  
A
Address Book, 118  
Administrator Settings, 155  
Administrator Tools List, 155  
Authorized Reception, 172  
Auto Document, 65, 158  
Changing, 158  
Adding, 21  
Checking, 18  
Deleting, 20  
Displaying the Memory Status, 33  
Document Server, 133  
Delete File, 138  
Manage File, 136  
Storing a Document, 134  
Dual Access, 78  
Deleting, 159  
Sending, 65  
Storing, 158  
Auto Fax Reception Power-up, 95  
Automatic Redial, 78  
Auto Reduce, 74  
E
ECM (Error Correction Mode), 155, 165  
B
Economy Transmission Time,  
3
Basic Transmission, 112  
Batch Transmission, 78  
Book Fax, 61  
E-mail transfer, 94  
E-mail TX Results, 80, 116  
End Receiver, 163  
Error Mail Notification, 199  
Error Report, 197  
Error Report (E-Mail), 199  
Expansion Memory, 204  
Extra G3 Interface Unit, 204  
Box Setting, 156, 180  
C
Canceling  
Transmission, 19  
Center Mark, 96  
Chain Dial, 47  
F
Checkered Mark, 96  
Checking  
Fax Header Print, 73  
Fax via Computer, 107  
File  
Transmission Result (TX File Status)  
Combine 2 originals, 83  
Combine Two originals, 99  
Communication Failure Report, 82  
Communication Information, 27  
Communication Result Report  
(Memory Transmission), 81  
Confidential File Report, 37  
Confidential ID, 191  
,
31  
Printing, 23  
Printing a List of Files  
in Memory (Print TX File List), 25  
Resending, 24  
Forwarding, 90, 155, 162, 173  
Free Polling Transmission, 11, 12  
Full/Partial agreement, 171  
Confidential Message, 36  
Confidential Transmission,  
Counters, 155, 162  
G
9
General Settings/Adjustment, 144  
H
Handy Dialing Functions, 47  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
O
ID Override Polling Reception, 14  
ID Override Transmission, 11  
Image Rotation, 79, 99  
Immediate Reception, 83  
Immediate TX Result Report  
(Immediate Transmission), 82  
Information Boxes, 42, 185  
Changing, 184  
On Hook Dial, 56  
Optional Equipment, 204  
Originals, 208  
Output Tray, 105  
P
Page Reduction, 101  
Page Separation and Length Reduction  
Paper Tray, 147  
Parallel Memory Transmission, 77  
Parameter Setting, 155  
Personal Boxes, 40, 181, 183  
Changing, 181  
,
100  
Deleting, 185  
Printing, 190  
Programming, 184  
Storing Messages, 42  
J
Deleting, 183  
JBIG, 79, 95  
Reception, 95  
Transmission, 79  
Journal, 27  
Journal by E-mail, 80  
Journal by E-mail, Transmitting, 80  
Just size printing, 103  
Printing, 190  
Programming, 181  
Polling ID, 192  
Polling Reception, 14  
Polling Reserve Report, 16  
Polling Result Report, 16  
Polling Transmission, 11  
Polling Transmission Clear Report, 13  
Power Failure Report, 198  
Print 2 Sided, 173  
Print Completion Beep, 96  
Printed Report, 81  
Printing  
K
Keystroke Program, 129  
L
Box List, 190  
Label Insertion, 73  
LAN-Fax Operation Messages, 122  
LAN-Fax Properties, Setting, 110  
Line Type  
Confidential Message, 36  
File Received with Memory Lock, 38  
Information Box Messages, 44  
Journal, 27  
Changing, 59  
Selecting, 202  
Options, 96  
Personal Box Messages, 41  
Special Sender List, 180  
Printing and Saving, 118  
Priority trays, 102  
Programs, 129  
M
Manual Dial, 58  
Maximum Value, 212  
Memory Lock, 38, 165, 174  
Memory Lock ID, 192  
Memory Reception, 83  
Memory Status, 33  
Memory Storage Report, 81  
More Transmission Functions, 77  
Multi-copy, 83  
Changing, 129  
Deleting, 131  
Registering, 129  
PWD Code, 51  
Q
Quick Operation key, 146  
Multi-copy Reception, 98  
Multi-port, 59  
Multistep Transfer, 88  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R
T
RDS (Remote Diagnostic System), 198  
Receiving Station, 52, 87  
Reception, 83  
Telephone Line, 201  
Transfer Boxes, 189  
Changing, 186  
Reception Features, 83  
Deleting, 189  
Printing, 190  
Programming, 186  
Reception File Print Quantity, 173  
Reception Functions, 87  
Reception Reverse Printing, 174  
Reception Settings, 147  
Reception Time, 97  
Transfer Report, 190  
Transfer Request, 52  
Transfer Result Report, 88  
Transfer Result Report  
(transfer request by e-mail), 89  
Transferring, 91  
Transfer Station, 52, 87  
Transmission Features, 47  
Transmission Mode,  
Reception Result (RX File Status), 32  
Redial, 47  
Reduced Image Transmission, 74  
Report, 81  
Communication Failure Report, 82  
Communication Result Report  
(Memory Transmission), 81  
Error Report, 197  
3
Transmission Options, 73  
Transmission Time  
Immediate TX Result Report  
(Immediate Transmission), 82  
Memory Storage Report, 81  
Power Failure Report, 198  
Requesting Party, 52, 87  
Reverse Order Printing, 83, 100  
RX File Status, 32  
Changing, 22  
Transmission with Image Rotation, 79  
Tray for Lines, 105  
Tray Shift, 105  
TSI Print, 101  
Two-Sided Printing, 97  
Two-Sided Transmission, 62  
TX File, 18  
S
TX File Status, 31  
Scan Size, 160  
Changing, 160  
U
Deleting, 160  
Programming, 160  
User Parameter List, 167  
User Parameters, 166  
Scan size  
Deleting, 161  
Selecting  
Dial/Push Phone, 193  
Send Later,  
3
SEP Code, 50  
Server-Generated Error E-mail, 199  
SID Code, 50  
Simultaneous Broadcast, 79  
SMTP, 93  
SMTP reception, 92  
Special Senders, 171  
Special Senders to Treat Differently, 171  
Specifications, 205  
Stamp, 72  
Standard Messages, 157  
Deleting, 158  
Programming, 157  
Standard Message Stamp, 64  
SUB Code, 49, 91  
Substitute Reception, 85  
Switches and Bits, 166  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
216  
EN  
USA  
B712-8511  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copyright © 2005  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printed in Japan  
EN USA B712-8511  
B7128511  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

RCA Clock Radio RC10 User Guide
Realistic Scanner PRO 2024 User Guide
Riccar Vacuum Cleaner R20D User Guide
RIDGID Saw R3121 User Guide
Ryobi Outdoor Log Splitter RY49701 User Guide
Samsung Air Conditioner AWT20FBMBA BB User Guide
Samsung Refrigerator SRG 058 User Guide
Samsung Security Camera SNP 5430 User Guide
Sears Lawn Mower 24737028 User Guide
Sears Lawn Mower 91725953 User Guide